SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Betriebsanleitung Operating Instructions 7/2012 SINAMICS drives SINAMICS DCM Cabinet ___________________ Preface 1 ___________________ Safety notes SINAMICS SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 2 ___________________ Device overview 3 ___________________ Mechanical installation ___________________ 4 Electrical installation ___________________ 5 Commissioning Operating Instructions ___________________ 6 Operation Functions, monitoring and ___________________ 7 protective functions Diagnostics / faults and ___________________ 8 alarms ___________________ 9 Maintenance and servicing ___________________ 10 Technical specifications ___________________ 11 Options ___________________ A Appendix 7/2012 A5E03740557 Legal information Legal information Warning notice system This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are graded according to the degree of danger. DANGER indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken. WARNING indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken. CAUTION without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. NOTICE indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the relevant information is not taken into account. If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property damage. Qualified Personnel The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems. Proper use of Siemens products Note the following: WARNING Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed. Trademarks All names identified by (R) are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner. Disclaimer of Liability We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions. Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG GERMANY Order number: 6RX1800-0SD74 07/2012 Technical data subject to change Copyright (c) Siemens AG 2012. All rights reserved Preface Scope of supply The SINAMICS DCM Cabinet is a part of a CDM (complete drive module) within the meaning of the definition in product standard EN61800-5-1 Chapter 3.1.2. The closed-loop control system and sequential control system within the meaning of this definition are not included in the scope of supply. User documentation WARNING Please read all the safety and warning notices carefully and all warning labels attached to the devices and cabinets before installation and commissioning of the electrical installation. The warning labels must always be legible. Missing or damaged labels must be replaced. Structure of this documentation The customer documentation comprises general and individual documentation. The general documentation describes the topics relevant to all versions of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet and contains: SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions The Operating Instructions consist of the following sections: - Device description - Mechanical installation - Electrical installation - Commissioning guide - Description of function - Maintenance instructions - Technical specifications Overview diagrams These provide a general overview of the functionality of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinets. Basic function diagrams These provide an overview of the basic functions of the system for simple applications. SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Operating Instructions SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 3 Preface SINAMICS DCM List Manual The List Manual consists of the following sections: - Parameter list - Function diagrams - Fault / warning list Free function blocks manual Documentation for Drive Control Chart (DCC) - Programming and Operating Manual: DCC Editor description - Function Manual: Description of the standard DCC blocks The individual device documentation describes precisely one customized system and contains the following: Dimension drawing The dimension drawing documents the dimensions of the ordered system. Layout diagram The components installed in the ordered system are displayed in the layout diagram with the equipment codes and location codes. Circuit diagram The circuit diagram displays the electrical components installed in the ordered system including the equipment codes and location codes, their interconnections and the customer interfaces. Terminal diagram The terminal diagram shows all the customer terminals of the ordered system and the associated internal cabinet wiring. This diagram documents the line-side target wiring. Parts list All of the available spare parts for the ordered system are listed in the parts list with the equipment codes, the location codes and the order designation. Additional Operating Instructions The instructions for OEM components installed in the ordered system are supplied as OEM documentation. Service You can find information on our services and regional contact persons in the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/16604318) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 4 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Preface Technical Support You can obtain technical assistance for products, systems, and solutions from our Technical support (www.siemens.com/automation/support-request) Central hotlines for Technical Support for the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet European and African time zone Phone: +49 (0)911 895 7222 Fax: +49 (0)911 895 7223 email (mailto:support.automation@siemens.com) America time zone 24-hour hotline: +1 800 333 7421 Asia/Australia time zone 8:00 to 17:00 CET Phone: +1 423 262 2960 Fax: +1 423 262 2200 email (mailto:support.america.automation@siemens.com) 8:00 to 17:00 Eastern Standard Time Phone: +86 1064 757575 Fax: +86 1064 747474 email (mailto:support.asia.automation@siemens.com) 7:30 to 17:30 Beijing local time Spare parts You can find information on spare parts In catalog D23.2 On the Internet from the electronic spare parts catalog Spares On Web by entering the serial number and order number of your SINAMICS DCM Cabinet (registration required) Spares On Web (http://workplace.automation.siemens.de/sparesonweb) In the supplied documentation: The parts list contains the order designations (MLFB) of the components used. Internet addresses Documents (manuals, certificates, FAQ etc. ) for the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet and the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter can be accessed on the following websites. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/54418574/130000) SINAMICS DCM DC Converter (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/52233399/130000) Information about SINAMICS can be found at the following address: SINAMICS (http://www.siemens.com/sinamics) For Germany: "Noise protection" leaflet with additional links published by the DGUV (German Social Accident Insurance) (http://publikationen.dguv.de/dguv/pdf/10002/flyer-laerm.pdf) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 5 Preface SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 6 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Table of contents Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3 1 2 3 4 Safety notes............................................................................................................................................. 13 1.1 Warning notices ...........................................................................................................................13 1.2 Safety and application instructions ..............................................................................................14 1.3 ESD-sensitive components..........................................................................................................15 Device overview....................................................................................................................................... 17 2.1 Chapter content ...........................................................................................................................17 2.2 Description ...................................................................................................................................17 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 2.3.8 Design ..........................................................................................................................................20 Frame size BC .............................................................................................................................21 Frame size CC .............................................................................................................................22 Frame size DC .............................................................................................................................23 Frame size EC .............................................................................................................................24 Frame size FC..............................................................................................................................25 Terminal Module Cabinet.............................................................................................................26 Cabinet fan...................................................................................................................................26 Degrees of protection of drive cabinets .......................................................................................27 2.4 Main components - overview .......................................................................................................28 2.5 Block diagram ..............................................................................................................................30 2.6 Type plate ....................................................................................................................................31 Mechanical installation............................................................................................................................. 33 3.1 Chapter content ...........................................................................................................................33 3.2 Transportation and storage..........................................................................................................33 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.2.1 3.3.2.2 3.3.2.3 3.3.2.4 3.3.2.5 3.3.3 3.3.3.1 3.3.3.2 3.3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 Mounting ......................................................................................................................................35 Mechanical installation: checklist .................................................................................................35 Preparation...................................................................................................................................36 On-site requirements ...................................................................................................................36 Requirements on the levelness of the floor .................................................................................38 Shipping and handling indicators .................................................................................................39 Unpacking ....................................................................................................................................41 Required tools ..............................................................................................................................41 Installation ....................................................................................................................................41 Lifting the cabinet off the transport pallet.....................................................................................41 Disassembling the crane transport assembly ..............................................................................43 Installation ....................................................................................................................................44 Mechanical connection of transport units ....................................................................................44 Fitting additional canopies (option M21) or hoods (option M23, M43, M54) ...............................45 Electrical installation ................................................................................................................................ 49 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 7 Table of contents 4.1 Chapter content........................................................................................................................... 49 4.2 Checklist for electrical installation ............................................................................................... 49 4.3 Important safety precautions....................................................................................................... 56 4.4 Introduction to EMC .................................................................................................................... 57 4.5 EMC-compliant design ................................................................................................................ 58 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.6.4 4.6.5 4.6.6 4.6.7 4.6.8 Cable routing............................................................................................................................... 60 Armature AC ............................................................................................................................... 60 DC armature................................................................................................................................ 62 Infeed AC auxiliary power supply................................................................................................ 64 Field DC ...................................................................................................................................... 66 Terminal Module Cabinet (TMC)................................................................................................. 68 Analog tachometer ...................................................................................................................... 70 Terminal strip X2 ......................................................................................................................... 73 Terminals XK, input and output coupling relay ........................................................................... 74 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4 Power connections...................................................................................................................... 75 Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 75 Connection cross-sections .......................................................................................................... 75 Connecting the motor and power cables .................................................................................... 76 Main switch incl. fuses/circuit breakers....................................................................................... 77 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 External supply............................................................................................................................ 79 230 V AC auxiliary supply ........................................................................................................... 79 24 V DC auxiliary supply ............................................................................................................. 79 4.9 4.9.1 Signal connections ...................................................................................................................... 80 Terminal Module Cabinet (TMC) A7119 terminal strip X71 or X72 (with option G10, G11)....... 80 4.10 4.10.1 4.10.2 4.10.3 4.10.4 4.10.5 Other connections ....................................................................................................................... 85 Analog tachometer connection ................................................................................................... 86 m.c.b. trip combined alarm signal ............................................................................................... 86 External E-STOP button.............................................................................................................. 87 Input coupling relays ................................................................................................................... 87 Output coupling relays ................................................................................................................ 88 4.11 Connecting the options ............................................................................................................... 88 5 Commissioning ........................................................................................................................................ 89 6 Operation................................................................................................................................................. 95 7 Functions, monitoring and protective functions ........................................................................................ 97 7.1 Overview of the functions............................................................................................................ 97 7.2 Scope of supply........................................................................................................................... 97 7.3 Block diagrams............................................................................................................................ 99 7.4 Auxiliary supply ......................................................................................................................... 102 7.5 Power unit infeed ...................................................................................................................... 102 7.6 Armature circuit supply power circuit ........................................................................................ 103 7.7 Field supply power circuit.......................................................................................................... 104 7.8 Control functions for switch on, switch off and release............................................................. 104 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 8 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Table of contents 8 9 10 11 7.9 E-STOP......................................................................................................................................105 7.10 Control of equipment fan, cabinet fan and motor fan ................................................................105 Diagnostics / faults and alarms .............................................................................................................. 107 8.1 Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................107 8.2 8.2.1 Operating states, alarms and faults ...........................................................................................107 General information on alarms and faults..................................................................................108 Maintenance and servicing .................................................................................................................... 111 9.1 Chapter content .........................................................................................................................111 9.2 9.2.1 Maintenance...............................................................................................................................112 Cleaning .....................................................................................................................................112 9.3 Maintenance...............................................................................................................................113 9.4 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.4.5 Replacing components ..............................................................................................................114 Replacing the filter mats ............................................................................................................115 Replacing the cabinet fan ..........................................................................................................116 Replacing fuses .........................................................................................................................117 Replacing the door-mounted operator panel .............................................................................119 Replacing the back-up battery in the AOP30 operator panel ....................................................119 9.5 Maintenance and replacing the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter...............................................121 9.6 Load the cabinet-specific parameter settings to parameter data set 20....................................122 9.7 Messages after replacement of DRIVE-CLiQ components .......................................................123 9.8 Loading new operator panel firmware from the PC ...................................................................124 Technical specifications......................................................................................................................... 125 10.1 Chapter content .........................................................................................................................125 10.2 10.2.1 10.2.2 General data ..............................................................................................................................125 Load types..................................................................................................................................127 Derating......................................................................................................................................131 10.3 Technical specifications .............................................................................................................134 10.4 Cable types ................................................................................................................................179 Options .................................................................................................................................................. 181 11.1 11.1.1 11.1.2 11.1.3 11.1.4 11.1.5 11.1.6 11.1.7 11.1.8 11.1.9 11.1.10 11.1.11 11.1.12 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter .................................................................................................181 G00, Advanced CUD left............................................................................................................181 G10, standard CUD right ...........................................................................................................183 G11, Advanced CUD right .........................................................................................................185 G20, Communication Board CBE20 left ....................................................................................187 G21, Communication Board CBE20 right ..................................................................................190 L10, without field power unit ......................................................................................................193 L11, 2Q field power unit .............................................................................................................193 L21, unit fan for single-phase connection ..................................................................................194 L85, 85 A field power unit ..........................................................................................................194 M10, nickel-plated copper busbars............................................................................................195 S01, memory card left................................................................................................................195 S02, memory card right..............................................................................................................196 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 9 Table of contents 11.2 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4 11.2.5 11.2.6 11.2.7 11.2.8 11.2.9 Other voltages, frequencies ...................................................................................................... 196 L04 armature supply with extra-low voltage 10 to 50 V ............................................................ 196 L05, electronics power supply for connection to 24 V DC ........................................................ 197 L06, 24 V DC supply with SITOP.............................................................................................. 197 L07, 24 V DC power supply from an external supply................................................................ 197 L09, 24 V DC power supply using SITOP UPS ........................................................................ 199 V60, rated line frequency 60 Hz................................................................................................ 199 Y02, adaptation transformer for the field supply ....................................................................... 200 Y03, 3AC auxiliary voltage not available................................................................................... 201 Y04, 3 AC auxiliary voltage not the same as the standard voltage .......................................... 202 11.3 11.3.1 11.3.2 OFF functions............................................................................................................................ 203 B30, intervention option for the infeed circuit breaker interlocking ........................................... 203 L57, EMERGENCY OFF Category 0 for uncontrolled stopping in accordance with EN 60204-1 ..................................................................................................................................... 205 L59, EMERGENCY STOP Category 1 for controlled stopping in accordance with EN 60204-1 ..................................................................................................................................... 207 11.3.3 11.4 11.4.1 11.4.2 11.4.3 11.4.4 11.4.5 11.4.6 11.4.7 11.4.8 Display instruments................................................................................................................... 210 B60, display instrument "speed" ............................................................................................... 210 B61, display instrument "armature voltage" .............................................................................. 211 B62, display instrument "armature current" .............................................................................. 212 B63, display instrument, "line voltage excitation"...................................................................... 213 B64, display instrument "excitation current".............................................................................. 213 B65, display instrument, "line voltage armature circuit" ............................................................ 214 B66, display instrument "Line current armature circuit" ............................................................ 214 P11, display instrument for line values with PROFIBUS connection (installed in the cabinet door) ............................................................................................................................. 215 11.5 11.5.1 11.5.2 11.5.3 11.5.4 11.5.5 11.5.6 11.5.7 11.5.8 11.5.9 11.5.10 11.5.11 11.5.12 11.5.13 11.5.14 11.5.15 11.5.16 11.5.17 11.5.18 Supplementary circuits.............................................................................................................. 216 C51, 24 V coil voltage of the coupling relay at the binary inputs .............................................. 216 K85, field reversal ..................................................................................................................... 218 L00, radio interference suppression filter.................................................................................. 219 L22, elimination of the three-phase commutating reactor......................................................... 220 L50, cabinet lighting and service socket outlet ......................................................................... 220 L55, cabinet anti-condensation heating .................................................................................... 223 V70, input isolating amplifier input: 0 mA to 20 mA .................................................................. 226 V71, input isolating amplifier input: 4 mA to 20 mA .................................................................. 228 V72, input isolating amplifiers input: 0 V to +10 V .................................................................... 229 V73, input isolating amplifier input: -20 mA to +20 mA ............................................................. 230 V74, input isolating amplifier input: -10 V to +10 V ................................................................... 231 Y51, mechanical motor brake ................................................................................................... 232 Y52, output isolating amplifier output: 0 mA to 20 mA.............................................................. 234 Y53, output isolating amplifier output: 4 mA to 20 mA.............................................................. 236 Y54, output isolating amplifier output: 0 V to 10 V.................................................................... 236 Y55, output isolating amplifier output: -20 mA to +20 mA......................................................... 237 Y56, output isolating amplifier output: -10 V to 10 V................................................................. 237 Y60, coupling relay for binary output ........................................................................................ 238 11.6 11.6.1 11.6.2 11.6.3 Motor-relevant options .............................................................................................................. 240 A06, brush wear monitoring, limit signal, isolated..................................................................... 240 A30, anti-condensation heating for motor up to maximum 2000 W, 230V ............................... 242 A97, air flow monitoring in the motor ........................................................................................ 244 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 10 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Table of contents 11.6.4 11.6.5 11.6.6 11.6.7 11.6.8 L86, evaluation unit for the following temperature sensors: KTY84-130, PT100 2-wire and 3-wire, PT1000 2-wire and 3-wire, NTC ....................................................................................246 W15, no output to be provided for a motor fan ..........................................................................248 W20 to W41, setting range of the motor circuit breaker for the motor fan.................................249 W70 to W91, feeder for a second motor fan..............................................................................252 Y01, matching transformer for motor fan ...................................................................................254 11.7.7 11.7.8 Monitoring functions...................................................................................................................255 B83, overvoltage protection .......................................................................................................255 L52, ARC detector (arcing detector) ..........................................................................................257 L82, fault current monitoring in the grounded line supply (TN or TT supply system) ................257 L84, PTC evaluation device for alarm and fault for two sensors ...............................................260 L87, insulation monitoring in non-grounded line supplies (IT system) with insulating monitoring devices from the Bender company ..........................................................................263 L88, insulation monitoring in non-grounded line supplies (IT system) with insulating monitoring devices from the AREVA company..........................................................................265 L90, CCP (Converter Commutation Protector) ..........................................................................268 L99, monitoring the temperature inside the drive cabinet..........................................................270 11.8 11.8.1 11.8.2 11.8.3 Supplementary modules ............................................................................................................271 G60, customer terminal block extension using a Terminal Module TM31.................................271 G62, customer terminal block extension using a Terminal Module TM15.................................274 K50, Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30.........................................................................277 11.9 11.9.1 11.9.2 11.9.3 11.9.4 11.9.5 11.9.6 11.9.7 11.9.8 Mechanical options ....................................................................................................................280 M21, degree of protection IP21..................................................................................................280 M23, IP23 degree of protection..................................................................................................281 M43, degree of protection IP43..................................................................................................282 M54, degree of protection IP54 with filter elements...................................................................283 M58, degree of protection IP54 with climate control system .....................................................284 M59, closed cabinet door, air inlet from below through floor opening .......................................284 M60, additional shock protection ...............................................................................................285 M66, marine version ..................................................................................................................285 11.10 11.10.1 11.10.2 11.10.3 Other options..............................................................................................................................286 K07, without Advanced Operator Panel AOP30 ........................................................................286 L91, commissioning interface (PROFIBUS) routed to the outside ............................................286 U09, version according to the requirements of UL ....................................................................287 11.7 11.7.1 11.7.2 11.7.3 11.7.4 11.7.5 11.7.6 Documentation ...........................................................................................................................288 11.11 11.11.1 D19, circuit diagram prepared for motor overtemperature monitoring using a limit value transmitter ..................................................................................................................................288 11.11.2 D20, circuit diagram prepared for motor temperature monitoring..............................................289 11.11.3 D21, circuit diagram prepared for speed actual value sensing (pulse encoder) .......................290 11.11.4 D22, circuit diagram prepared for speed actual value sensing (analog tachometer) ................291 A Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 293 A.1 Connectable conductor cross-sections for screw terminals ......................................................293 A.2 Environment, resources and recycling.......................................................................................296 A.3 Standards...................................................................................................................................298 A.4 Certifications ..............................................................................................................................299 Index...................................................................................................................................................... 301 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 11 Table of contents SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 12 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 1 Safety notes 1.1 Warning notices WARNING Hazardous voltages are present when electrical equipment is in operation. Severe personal injury or substantial material damage may result if these warnings are not observed. Only qualified personnel are permitted to work on or around the equipment. This personnel must be thoroughly familiar with all warning and maintenance procedures described in these operating instructions. The successful and safe operation of this device is dependent on correct transport, proper storage and installation, as well as careful operation and maintenance. National safety guidelines must be observed. DANGER Operation of electrical installations in accordance with EN 50110-1 This standard applies to the operation of and all work on, with or in the vicinity of electrical installations. The "five safety rules" must be observed in particular for all work: 1. Disconnect the system. 2. 3. 4. 5. Protect against reconnection. Make sure that the equipment is de-energized. Ground and short-circuit. Cover or fence off adjacent components that are still live. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 13 Safety notes 1.2 Safety and application instructions 1.2 Safety and application instructions DANGER This electrical equipment is used in industrial high-voltage installations. During operation, this equipment contains rotating parts (fan) and live, bare parts. For this reason, it could cause severe injury or significant material damage if the required covers are removed without authorization, if the equipment is used or operated incorrectly, or if it has not been properly maintained. When the equipment is used in non-industrial areas, the installation location must be protected against unauthorized access (e.g. protective fencing). NOTICE In a residential environment this product can cause high-frequency disturbances, which may make interference suppression measures necessary. Preconditions Those responsible for protecting the plant must ensure the following: The basic planning work for the plant and the transport, assembly, installation, commissioning, maintenance, and repair work is carried out by qualified personnel and/or checked by experts responsible. The operating instructions must always be available for all of the work that is performed. The technical data and specifications regarding the permissible installation, connection, environmental and operating conditions are always consequentially observed. The country-specific and plant-specific installation and safety guidelines are observed and personal protection equipment is used. Unqualified personnel are forbidden from using this equipment and working near this equipment. These Operating Instructions are intended for qualified personnel and only contain information and notes relating to the intended purpose of the equipment. The Operating Instructions are in the languages specified in the supply contracts. Note We recommend engaging the support and services of your local Siemens service center for all planning, installation, commissioning and maintenance work. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 14 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Safety notes 1.3 ESD-sensitive components WARNING Hearing protection Note the regional regulations for the use of hearing protection. In general, the use of hearing protection is required or recommended for a sound level of 80 dB(A). The noise emission for the ordered system is specified in Chapter Technical specifications (Page 134) in the line, fan noise. For Germany, you will find an Internet link on this topic in the preface under Internet addresses. 1.3 ESD-sensitive components CAUTION The electronic boards contain electrostatic sensitive devices. These can be easily destroyed if not handled properly. If you have to work with electronic modules, please note: You should only touch electronic modules if absolutely necessary. If you do have to touch modules, your body must be electrically discharged first. Boards must not come into contact with highly insulating materials (such as plastic parts, insulated desktops, articles of clothing manufactured from man-made fibers). Modules must only be set down on conductive surfaces. Boards and components should only be stored and transported in conductive packaging (such as metalized plastic boxes or metal containers). If the packaging material is not conductive, the modules must be wrapped with a conductive packaging material (such as conductive foam rubber or household aluminum foil). The necessary ESD protection measures are elucidated once again in the following illustration: Seated Standing Seated/standing a conductive floor b ESD Table c ESD footwear "d" ESD smock e ESD wrist strap f cubicle ground connection SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 15 Safety notes 1.3 ESD-sensitive components SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 16 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Device overview 2.1 2 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following: Introduction to the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet The design of the systems and the main components The circuit principle Explanation of the type plate 2.2 Description The SINAMICS drive family Area of application SINAMICS is the family of drives from Siemens designed for machine and plant construction. SINAMICS offers solutions for all drive tasks: Variants Depending on the application, the SINAMICS range offers the ideal variant for any drive task. SINAMICS DCM is the DC drive belonging to the SINAMICS family. As a result of its uniform expandability, it can handle both basic and demanding requirements for drive applications and complementary markets. Platform concept and Totally Integrated Automation All SINAMICS variants are based on a platform concept. Joint hardware and software components, as well as standardized tools for dimensioning, configuration, and commissioning tasks ensure high-level integration across all components. SINAMICS handles a wide variety of drive tasks with no system gaps. The different SINAMICS variants can be easily combined with each other. SINAMICS is part of the Siemens "Totally Integrated Automation" concept. The degree of integration of SINAMICS with respect to engineering, data management, and communication with the automation level means that solutions with the SIMOTION, SINUMERIK and SIMATIC control systems can be cost-effectively implemented. Quality management to DIN EN ISO 9001 SINAMICS is able to meet the highest quality requirements. Comprehensive quality assurance measures in all development and production processes ensure a consistently high level of quality. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 17 Device overview 2.2 Description Our quality management system is certified by an independent authority in accordance with DIN EN ISO 9001. System properties The SINAMICS range is characterized by the following system properties: Standard and seamless functionality based on a platform concept Standardized engineering High degree of flexibility and combination capability Wide range of power ratings Designed for global use Economic efficiency and effectiveness High energy efficiency Versatile interfacing facilities to higher-level controllers Totally Integrated Automation SINAMICS DC MASTER Cabinet The SINAMICS DC MASTER Cabinet is the ready-for-connection drive cabinet. The SINAMICS DC MASTER DC Converter forms the heart of the cabinet and is scalable in many areas, including computer performance, field power supply, armature power supply and interfaces. The basic version of the SINAMICS DC MASTER Cabinet itself comes with all the components required to supply power to a DC motor from the three-phase network, is ready for connection and can be put into operation immediately via the AOP30. In addition to the DC Converter options, the SINAMICS DC MASTER Cabinet has a large number of cabinet options and can therefore be adapted to a wide range of different requirements and conditions. Optionally, for example, it is possible to adapt the system to the environmental conditions or to the available auxiliary power supply. It is also possible to use the basic version of the cabinet as a starting point for order-specific adaptations, from simply rounding off a standard option to power expansion or special applications. Main applications Industrial machines and plants (steel/aluminum, plastics, printing, paper, cranes, mining, oil and gas) in the new plant and retrofit business Application examples Rolling mills Cross cutters and shears Wire-drawing machines Drilling rigs Extruders and kneaders SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 18 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Device overview 2.2 Description Presses Elevators and cranes Cableways and lifts Mine hoists Test stand drives Highlights Ready for connection and ready for switching on The SINAMICS DC MASTER Cabinet is ready for connection and ready for switching on. This can reduce planning and commissioning times and plant downtimes, and functionality is guaranteed by means of optimally coordinated components. Supply for motor fan The power supply for the external fan of the DC motor is part of the basic version, including motor circuit breakers. The set values of the circuit breaker can be tuned to the motor by selecting the corresponding option. Flexibility in the auxiliary power supply SINAMICS DC MASTER Cabinets can be used universally and flexibly for wide voltage ranges. Adaptation to the existing control voltage is particularly significant for modernization of existing installations. The auxiliary power supply of the converter cabinet is adjusted by specifying the existing mains voltage. If no separate auxiliary power supply is available, it is branched off inside the cabinet. EMC zone concept Thanks to the EMC zone concept, the SINAMICS DC MASTER Cabinet is ideally designed for industry both in terms of robustness to interference and in terms of low emitted interference. The zone concept applies to the spatial arrangement of the built-in components. These include the electrical/electronic devices, but also cables for energy and signals, which may be sources of interference or susceptible equipment. Separate cable routing and high frequency low-ohm connections are a characteristic of the concept. In order to apply this concept to the line-side as well, the easily accessible customer interfaces not only provide the appropriate terminals and shield buses, but also provide sufficient space to place cable shields as per regulations. The drive cabinet designed as per this concept provides fault-free operation in terms of electromagnetic compatibility. See also Chapter EMC-compliant design (Page 58) Monitoring the internal temperature of the drive cabinet The availability of a drive is in practice often influenced by changes in environmental conditions: - Additional external heat sources in the environment can increase the air intake temperature. - Unusually high contamination in the air clogs up the air intake filter. - Subsequent addition to the drive cabinet of devices with high heat loss places an additional load on heat dissipation in the cabinet. Monitoring the internal temperature of the drive cabinet via a PTC thermistor sensor can identify these influences early and remedial measures can be applied in good time. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 19 Device overview 2.3 Design Good access to individual components and interfaces Despite the compact design, the individual components in the SINAMICS DC MASTER Cabinet are clearly arranged and easily accessible. The connecting terminals in particular are arranged in such a way that there is sufficient space for installation and strain relief of the lines and cables. The signal lines are grouped and routed on terminals in the lower part of the cabinet. Type-tested The SINAMICS DC MASTER Cabinets are type-tested. The comprehensive tests, e.g. for mechanical and electrical stability and heat dissipation, confirm our high quality requirements. Documentation A circuit diagram and a terminal diagram are supplied in addition to the manuals for the SINAMICS DC MASTER DC Converter. The plans are prepared individually and reflect the delivery state of the converter cabinets exactly. The plans can also be provided in digital format for integration into CAE systems by the customer. Project-specific special solutions In addition to 12-pulse series and 12-pulse parallel circuit configurations, solutions for power expansion or for use in the medium-voltage range can also be prepared (on request). Depending on requirements, the converter cabinet is mounted externally on the SINAMICS DC MASTER Converter or with the control module and separate power unit. Service Our worldwide sales and service network offers our customers consulting services tailored to their needs, provides support with planning and design, and offers a range of training courses. Contact information and the current link to our website can be found in the preface. 2.3 Design Note The detailed dimension drawing of your system can be found on the supplied DVD. The outstanding SINAMICS DCM Cabinets have a compact, modular, and service-friendly design. They contain all the required mains connection components, e.g. main switches, circuit breakers, main contactor and line fuses, and additional options such as line filter can be added. A wide range of options is therefore available, depending on the cabinet version, so that the drive system can be adapted optimally to the applicable requirements. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 20 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Device overview 2.3 Design 2.3.1 Frame size BC View, dimensions Figure 2-1 Frame size BC SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 21 Device overview 2.3 Design 2.3.2 Frame size CC View, dimensions Figure 2-2 Frame size CC SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 22 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Device overview 2.3 Design 2.3.3 Frame size DC View, dimensions Figure 2-3 Frame size DC SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 23 Device overview 2.3 Design 2.3.4 Frame size EC View, dimensions Figure 2-4 Frame size EC SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 24 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Device overview 2.3 Design 2.3.5 Frame size FC View, dimensions Figure 2-5 Frame size FC SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 25 Device overview 2.3 Design 2.3.6 Terminal Module Cabinet The Terminal Module Cabinet (TMC) is installed in the lower part of the cabinet. This means that all digital and analog inputs/outputs can be connected quickly and easily. The installation location has been chosen to ensure physical separation from the electric power cables and so that the cable length of the existing signal-carrying cables is usually sufficient to operate the signal terminals after modernization. The digital inputs/outputs are connected by a coupling relay to ensure reliability. Figure 2-6 Terminal Module Cabinet For terminal assignment, see Chapter Terminal Module Cabinet (TMC) A7119 terminal strip X71 or X72 (with option G10, G11) (Page 80). 2.3.7 Cabinet fan In the basic version, the frame size BC converter cabinets are equipped with a cabinet fan (roof mounting). Depending on the degree of protection, cabinet fans are also used for the cabinets of the other frame sizes (roof fan and/or fan in cabinet). The information regarding air flow (rate) and fan noise can be found in Chapter Technical specifications (Page 134). SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 26 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Device overview 2.3 Design 2.3.8 Degrees of protection of drive cabinets The EN 60529 standard covers the protection of electrical equipment by means of housings, covers or equivalent, and includes: Protection of persons against accidental contact with live or moving parts within the housing and protection of the equipment against the ingress of solid foreign matter (touch protection and protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies) Protection of the equipment against the ingress of water (water protection) Abbreviations for the internationally agreed degrees of protection The degrees of protection are specified by abbreviations comprising the code letters IP and two digits. Table 2- 1 Degrees of protection of the drive cabinet: Degrees of protection of the drive cabinet First code number (touch protection and protection against ingress of foreign solid matter) Second code number (protection of equipment against the ingress of water) Version of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet IP20 Protected against solid foreign bodies, diameter 12.5 mm. No water protection. Basic version IP21 Protected against solid foreign bodies, diameter 12.5 mm. Protected against drip water With option M21 Protected against solid foreign bodies, diameter 12.5 mm. Protected against spray water Protected against solid foreign bodies, diameter 1 mm. Protected against spray water Dust protected. Protected against splash water Ingress of dust is not totally prevented, but dust must not be allowed to enter in such quantities that the functioning or safety of the equipment is impaired. Water splashing onto the enclosure from any direction must not have a harmful effect. IP23 IP43 IP54 Vertically falling water drops shall not have a harmful effect. With option M23 Water sprayed on both sides of the vertical at an angle of up to max. 60 must not have a harmful effect. With option M43 Water sprayed on both sides of the vertical at an angle of up to max. 60 must not have a harmful effect. With option M54 (with filter mats) and with option M58 (with air conditioner) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 27 Device overview 2.4 Main components - overview 2.4 Main components - overview Example: frame size BC 6,1$0,&6 '&0$67(5 '&&RQYHUWHU $23$GYDQFHG2SHUDWRU3DQHO $X[LOLDU\VXSSO\0DLQVZLWFK 7UDQVIRUPHU FRYHUHG )LHOGFLUFXLWUHDFWRU FRYHUHG 0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQ'&IXVH $UPDWXUHFLUFXLWPDLQVZLWFK 7HUPLQDO0RGXOH&DELQHW $UPDWXUHFLUFXLWPDLQFRQWDFWRU $UPDWXUHFRQQHFWLRQWRHTXLSPHQW DOUHDG\RQVLWH $UPDWXUHFLUFXLWUHDFWRU 3URWHFWLYHFRQGXFWRUFRQQHFWLRQ Figure 2-7 Main components - overview, frame size BC SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 28 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Device overview 2.4 Main components - overview Example: frame size EC 6,1$0,&6 '&0$67(5 '&&RQYHUWHU $23 $GYDQFHG 2SHUDWRU3DQHO $X[LOLDU\VXSSO\ 0DLQVZLWFK 7UDQVIRUPHU FRYHUHG )LHOGFLUFXLW UHDFWRU FRYHUHG 0RWRU FRQQHFWLRQ LQ WKHGHYLFH $UPDWXUH FLUFXLWPDLQ VZLWFK &XVWRPHU WHUPLQDOV FRXSOLQJUHOD\V $UPDWXUH FRQQHFWLRQWR HTXLSPHQW DOUHDG\RQVLWH 7HUPLQDO 0RGXOH &DELQHW $UPDWXUH FLUFXLWUHDFWRU 3URWHFWLYH FRQGXFWRU FRQQHFWLRQ Figure 2-8 Main components - overview, frame size EC SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 29 Device overview 2.5 Block diagram 2.5 Block diagram /LQHFRQQHFWLRQ 0DLQVZLWFKIRUWKHDUPDWXUH FLUFXLWDQGDX[LOLDU\SRZHU VXSSO\ &DEOHDQGVHPLFRQGXFWRUIXVHV /LQHFRQWDFWRUFLUFXLWEUHDNHU VHPLFRQGXFWRUIXVHV! /LQHUHDFWRUV 8. 6,1$0,&6'&0'&&RQYHUWHU LQFOXGLQJILHOGPRGXOH 0RWRUFRQQHFWLRQV <1> The main switch, fuse and main contactor functions are provided by a circuit breaker in systems with an output current of 950 A. Figure 2-9 Block diagram SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 30 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Device overview 2.6 Type plate 2.6 Type plate Type plate 'HYLFHGHVLJQDWLRQ 2UGHUQXPEHU 2SWLRQV 3ODQWQXPEHU ([DPSOH 4% 0RQWKRIPDQXIDFWXUH <HDURIPDQXIDFWXUH Figure 2-10 Example of a type plate Date of manufacture The date of manufacture can be determined as follows: Table 2- 2 Year of manufacture, month of manufacture Character Year of manufacture Character Month of manufacture B 2011 1 to 9 January to September C 2012 O October D 2013 N November E 2014 D December SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 31 Device overview 2.6 Type plate SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 32 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Mechanical installation 3.1 3 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following: The conditions for transporting, storing, and installing the cabinet units The preparation and installation of the cabinets 3.2 Transportation and storage Transportation WARNING The following must be observed when transporting SINAMICS DCM Cabinets: The devices are heavy or generally top heavy. The center of gravity is marked on each cabinet and/or transport unit. Suitable hoisting gear operated by trained personnel is essential due to the weight of the devices. The devices must only be transported in the upright position indicated. The devices must not be transported upside down or horizontally. Serious injury or even death and substantial material damage can occur if the devices are not lifted or transported properly. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 33 Mechanical installation 3.2 Transportation and storage Note Notes regarding transportation The devices are packaged by the manufacturer in accordance with the climatic conditions and stress encountered during transit and in the recipient country. The notes on the packaging for transportation, storage, and proper handling must be observed. For transportation using forklifts, the devices must be set down on a wooden pallet. When the devices are unpacked, they can be transported using the transport eyebolts or rails (optional) affixed to the cabinet. The load must be distributed evenly. Strong shocks or impacts must be avoided during transit and when the devices are being set down, for example. Shock / tilt indicators are affixed to the cabinet to detect unacceptable impact or tilting of the cabinet during transport (see Chapter Shipping and handling indicators (Page 39)). Permissible ambient temperatures for transportation and storage: -25 C to +60 C, Class 2K2 in accordance with IEC60721-3-2 -25 C to +70 C, Class 2K3 with option M93 (seaworthy packaging) Note Notes regarding damage in transit Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet before accepting the delivery from the transportation company. Ensure that you have received all the items specified on the delivery note. Note every visible defect or all visible damage immediately on the delivery note before acceptance, with the signature of driver, and inform the transportation company and your Siemens contact person of the damage by sending them a copy of the delivery note. If you discover any hidden defects or damage, contact your local Siemens contact person immediately and request that the device is examined. If you fail to contact them immediately, you may lose your right to claim compensation for the defects and damage. WARNING Damage in transit indicates that the device was subject to unreasonable stress. The electrical safety of the device can no longer be ensured. Non-observance can result in death, severe personal injury, or substantial property damage. Storage The devices must be stored in clean, dry rooms. Temperatures between -5 C and +45 C are permitted. Temperature fluctuations greater than 20 K/h are not permitted. With option M93 (seaworthy packaging), temperatures between -25 C and +55 C are permitted. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 34 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Mechanical installation 3.3 Mounting If the cabinets are stored for a prolonged period once they have been unpacked, cover them or take other appropriate measures to ensure that they are protected against contamination and environmental influences. If such measures are not taken, the warranty becomes invalid in the event of a claim. CAUTION Do not apply mechanical loads to the hoods The hoods are delivered separately and must be installed on site. The hoods must not be subjected to mechanical loads; otherwise they may be destroyed. 3.3 Mounting WARNING To ensure that the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet operates safely and reliably, it must be properly installed and commissioned by qualified personnel, taking into account the warning notices provided in these Operating Instructions. In particular, the general and national installation and safety guidelines for high-voltage installations (e.g. VDE - the Union of German Technical Engineers) as well as the guidelines relating to the proper use of tools and personal protective equipment must be observed. Non-observance can result in death, severe personal injury, or substantial property damage. 3.3.1 Mechanical installation: checklist Use the following checklist to guide you through the mechanical installation procedure for the cabinet. Read the "Safety instructions" section at the start of these Operating Instructions before you start working on the device. Check the box accordingly in the "present" column if the option applies to your scope of supply. In the same way, check the boxes once you have finished the installation procedure to confirm that the activities are complete. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 35 Mechanical installation 3.3 Mounting Item Activity Yes Completed 1 Check the shipping and handling monitors prior to assembly and remove them before commissioning. See "Mechanical Installation / Shipping and handling indicators (Page 39)". 2 The ambient conditions must be permissible. See "Technical data / General data (Page 125)". The SINAMICS DCM Cabinet must be firmly attached to the fixing points provided. The cooling air can flow unobstructed. 3 The minimum ceiling height (for unhindered air outlet) specified in the Operating Instructions must be observed. The cooling air supply must not be obstructed (see "Mechanical installation/ Preparation (Page 36)"). 4 Transport units shipped separately must be connected to one another (see "Mechanical installation/ Mechanical connection of transport units (Page 44)"). 5 Components such as canopy or hood that are supplied separately for transportation reasons must be fitted (see "Mechanical installation/ Fitting additional canopies (option M21) or hoods (option M23, M43, M54) (Page 45)"). 6 The clearance around an open door (escape route) specified in the applicable accident prevention guidelines must be observed. 3.3.2 Preparation 3.3.2.1 On-site requirements The basic version of the SINAMICS DC MASTER Cabinet drive system cabinets (IP20 in accordance with EN 60529) are designed to be installed in closed electrical equipment rooms (in accordance with EN 61800-5-1). A closed electrical equipment room is a room or area containing electrical equipment that can only be accessed by trained or instructed personnel. Access is controlled by a door or other form of barrier that can be opened only by means of a key or other tool. The room or area is also clearly marked with appropriate warning notices. The equipment rooms must be dry and free of dust to prevent dirt collecting which, in conjunction with humidity, could create an electrically conductive connection between current-conducting parts. The air supplied must not contain any electrically conductive gas, vapors, or dust, which could impair operation. It may be necessary to filter the air supplied to the room where the equipment is installed. Electrical equipment rooms in electrical installations frequently have a central energy and fresh air supply that meet these requirements. If this is not the case, a drive cabinet with applicable options (M21, M23, M43, M54 and M58) at a higher degree of protection is available. See also "Degrees of protection of drive cabinets (Page 27)" and description of options. The permissible values for climatic environmental conditions must be taken into account. At temperatures >40 C for devices 210 A and >35 C for devices >210 A and site altitudes >1000 m, the devices must be derated. See also Chapter Derating (Page 131). SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 36 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Mechanical installation 3.3 Mounting The cooling air for the power unit is drawn in from the front through the ventilation grills in the lower part of the cabinet doors. The hot air is discharged through the perforated top panel or the ventilation grilles in the top cover (with option M23/M43/M54). Cooling air can also be supplied from below through raised/intermediate floors, air ducts etc. (with option M59). To allow this, openings must be made in the 3-section bottom panel or individual bottom panels must be removed. It must be ensured that the cooling air quantity specified in the technical data is available dust-free. ,3 ,3 ,3,3,3 &DELQHW &DELQHW &DELQHW %DVLFYHUVLRQ &DQRS\ZLWK VSDFHUV &DQRS\SODWH 0LQFHLOLQJKHLJKWLQPP 9HQWLODWLRQJULOOH 9DULDEOHDLURXWOHWDUHD $LULQOHW]RQH )LOWHUPDWV &DELQHWKHLJKWLQPP Figure 3-1 'RRUVZKLFKSURWHF WLYHJULOOHDQGILOWHUPDW +RRGZKLFKSURWHFWLYH JULOOHDQGILOWHUPDW Required room height for different degrees of protection The SINAMICS DCM Cabinets are not designed for use in public low-voltage networks that supply residential buildings because of the anticipated high-frequency interference, in accordance with EN 61800-3. However, additional measures (e.g. line filter, option L00) can be fitted for use in the "first environment" in accordance with EN 61800-3 Category C2 (TN/TT networks). SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 37 Mechanical installation 3.3 Mounting 3.3.2.2 Requirements on the levelness of the floor The foundation at the installation location of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinets must be level to ensure proper functioning of the cabinets. Care must be taken to ensure that the doors can be opened and closed and that the locking systems work properly. Flat sections (such as doors, side panels and hoods) must be sealed correctly to ensure compliance with the specified degree of protection. When cabinets are connected (e.g., transport units), air inlets caused by gaps must be prevented. Gaps where air can enter caused by leveling measures (e.g.: in the diagram) must be sealed. r Figure 3-2 Requirements on the levelness of the floor SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 38 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Mechanical installation 3.3 Mounting 3.3.2.3 Shipping and handling indicators The SINAMICS DCM Cabinets are equipped with tilt and shock indicators to monitor for damage during transportation. Figure 3-3 Tilt indicator Figure 3-4 Shock indicator Position of the shipping and handling monitors The tilt indicators are affixed to the top of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet inside the doors. The shock indicators are in the lower area inside the doors. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 39 Mechanical installation 3.3 Mounting Checking the shipping and handling monitors prior to commissioning Prior to commissioning, it is essential to check the shipping and handling monitors. Figure 3-5 Tilt indicator tripped The tilt indicator provides immediate visible evidence of whether the SINAMICS DCM Cabinets have been transported and stored upright. Blue-colored quartz sand begins to flow into the arrow-shaped indicator area. The tilt indicator has tripped when the blue color extends beyond the middle line of the arrowhead. Figure 3-6 Shock indicator tripped The shock indicator shows if an acceleration has exceeded 98.1 m/s2 (10 x g) and indicates the direction of acceleration. The black color of the arrows indicates that an impermissible shock load has occurred in the direction of the arrow. WARNING Inform Technical Support (hotline) Commissioning must not be carried out, if an indicator has tripped. Contact Technical Support immediately. The contact data are provided in the preface to this document. If commissioning is carried out without prior inspection of the indicators, safe operation of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet is not guaranteed. This can result in death, serious personal injury or material damage. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 40 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Mechanical installation 3.3 Mounting Removing the shipping and handling monitors prior to commissioning CAUTION The shipping and handling monitors must be removed before commissioning the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet. Failure to observe the shipping and handling monitors during operation of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet may cause damage to the equipment. 3.3.2.4 Unpacking Check the delivery against the delivery note to ensure that all the items have been delivered. Check that the cabinet is intact and has not been damaged. The packaging material must be disposed of in accordance with the applicable countryspecific guidelines and rules. 3.3.2.5 Required tools To install the connections, you will require: Wrench or socket wrench, width across the flats 10, 13, 16/17 and 18/19 Hexagon-socket wrench (size 8) Torque wrench from 5 Nm to 50 Nm Screwdriver, size 2 Torx T20 and T30 screwdrivers A socket wrench kit with two long extensions is recommended. 3.3.3 Installation 3.3.3.1 Lifting the cabinet off the transport pallet The applicable local guidelines regarding the transportation of the cabinet from the transport palette to the installation location must be observed. With option M90, crane transport aids (eyes) are fitted on the top of the cabinet, and transport irons are fitted for heavy cabinets. The fixing screws of the transport pallets can be removed without having to lift the cabinet. The positions of the fixing screws are indicated by red markings on the outside of the cabinets. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 41 Mechanical installation 3.3 Mounting Figure 3-7 Lifting from the transport pallet (left: without base; right: with base) For cabinets without base (in the figure on the left), the fixing screws of the transport pallets must be removed from the underside of the pallet. For cabinets with base (in the figure on the right), the fixing screws of the transport pallet are accessible only after the cover is opened. They can then be loosened and removed directly from the front. WARNING The weight specified on the packaging and the designated center of gravity must always be taken into account when the cabinet is lifted and transported! Particular attention must be paid to this potential danger once you have unscrewed the cabinets from the transport pallet! Center of gravity of cabinet The diagram below shows the center of gravity of the cabinet (for all sizes), which must always be taken into account when lifting and installing the cabinet. Figure 3-8 Center of gravity of the cabinet SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 42 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Mechanical installation 3.3 Mounting Note A sticker with the precise position of the center of gravity of the cabinet is attached to each cabinet and/or each transport unit. 3.3.3.2 Disassembling the crane transport assembly With option M90, the cabinets are supplied with top mounted crane transport aids: Transport eyebolts at a width of the cabinet or transport unit from 1600 mm The transport eyebolts can be unscrewed and removed. Mounting rails at >1600 mm The mounting rails can be dismantled by unscrewing the fixing screws. WARNING The mounting rails are heavy and must be removed very carefully. Screws can fall into the cabinet when it is disassembled and can cause serious damage when the equipment is operated. Figure 3-9 Option M90 fitted with mounting rails Original roof screws Figure 3-10 Original roof screws, accessory kit SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 43 Mechanical installation 3.3 Mounting After removing the crane transport aids, the removed transport eyebolts and/or the fixing screws of the mounting rail must be replaced with the original roof fastening screws (Rittal 4198.000) to ensure compliance with the degree of protection and proper grounding of the cabinet. Figure 3-11 3.3.3.3 Delivery state (left), original roof screws (right) Installation Four holes for M12 screws are provided on each cabinet panel to secure the cabinet to the ground. The fixing dimensions are specified on the dimension drawings enclosed. 3.3.4 Mechanical connection of transport units An accessory kit is supplied with each cabinet or transport unit to connect the cabinets in series-connected installation. The figure below shows the content of this accessory kit and the fixing points for connecting the cabinets. Figure 3-12 Series connector accessory kit SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 44 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Mechanical installation 3.3 Mounting 3.3.5 Fitting additional canopies (option M21) or hoods (option M23, M43, M54) To increase the degree of protection of the cabinets from IP20 (standard) to IP21, IP23, IP43, or IP54, additional canopies or hoods are supplied. These must be fitted once the cabinets have been installed. WARNING Screws and other small components that fall into the cabinet or the installed components during installation of the canopies or hoods can cause substantial damage during operation and must therefore be removed reliably before the drive cabinet is connected. Description The degree of protection can be increased to IP21 by fitting an additional canopy. The canopy is mounted using spacers at a distance of 250 mm above the top cover of the cabinet. As a result, all cabinets with a canopy are approx. 270 mm (250 mm + height of the canopy) higher. Systems with degree of protection IP23 are supplied with additional hoods, as well as plastic ventilation grilles in the air intake and the air outlet and additional plastic filters (mess width: 1 mm) in the air inlet (doors). The hoods are flush with the cabinets at the side and front and have a recess at the rear so that air can escape even if the cabinet is wall mounted. Air escapes from the front and back. The hood is secured via the four crane hook holes in the cabinet. Hoods increase the height of the cabinet by 400 mm. Systems with degree of protection IP43 are supplied with additional hoods, as well as plastic ventilation grilles and plastic filters (mess width: 1 mm) in the air inlet (doors) and air outlet (hoods). The hoods are flush with the cabinets at the side and front and have a recess at the rear so that air can escape even if the cabinet is wall mounted. Air escapes from the front and back. The hood is secured via the four crane hook holes in the cabinet. Attaching the hoods increases the height of the cabinet units by 400 mm. Compliance with degree of protection IP43 requires an intact filter medium, which must be serviced on a regular basis according to the prevailing ambient conditions. Systems with degree of protection IP54 are supplied with additional hoods, as well as plastic ventilation grilles and a filter (fine particulate air filter) in the air inlet (doors) and outlet (hoods). The hoods are flush with the cabinets at the side and front and have a recess at the rear so that air can escape even if the cabinet is wall mounted. Air escapes from the front and back. The hood is secured via the four crane hook holes in the cabinet. Hoods increase the height of the cabinet by 400 mm. Compliance with degree of protection IP54 requires an intact filter medium, which must be replaced on a regular basis according to the prevailing ambient conditions. Filters can be fitted and replaced from outside the cabinet relatively easily. With option M58 (IP54 with air conditioner), no additional installation work is required Note Install the canopy or hood at a an early stage! Attaching the canopy or hood at an early stage is recommended to prevent foreign matter entering the cabinets. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 45 Mechanical installation 3.3 Mounting Attaching a canopy to increase the degree of protection to IP21 (option M21) Figure 3-13 Fitting a canopy The canopy can be mounted variably in both directions (on the side and, to the front and back) on the top of the cabinet. The arrangement can be adapted to the various installation conditions for the cabinets. This produces an adjustable protrusion of the canopy at the front and back . In this way, it is possible to have a circumferential protrusion of the canopy, or direct contact with the wall or between the canopies in back-to-back installation. If necessary, the contact point with the wall or back-to-back installation must be sealed. Remove any existing crane transport assemblies. Attach the spacers (A) to the roof of the cabinet at the positions specified. Tighten the screws with contact discs applied from the bottom through the protective guard (tightening torque: 13 Nm for M6). Note The protective guard is fastened to the cabinet unit from the top using four screws. To facilitate assembly, it may be necessary to remove the protective guard, which must be reattached on completion of assembly work. Attach the canopy (B) to the spacers. Tighten the screws with contact discs applied from the top through the canopy (tightening torque: 13 Nm for M6). SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 46 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Mechanical installation 3.3 Mounting NOTICE There are overlaps on the sides of the canopies to prevent water dripping into the spaces between cabinets connected in series. When fitting the canopies, make sure these overlaps interlock. Fitting a hood to increase the degree of protection to IP23/IP43/IP54 (option M23/M43/M54) Figure 3-14 Attaching a hood 1. Remove the crane transport assembly (if fitted). 2. Make sure that a perforated top cover is not fitted on the top of the cabinet (depending on production requirements, this can be fitted at a later stage). 3. Secure the contact surfaces of the top hat to the top of the cabinet using the sealing tape provided. 4. Fit the hood to the roof of the cabinet at the positions specified (fixing points for the crane transport assembly). 5. Assemble original roof screws M12 from above. 6. M6 screw and washers (order: Attach the screw, spring-lock element, small washer, large washer) from below. 7. If the hood is very wide, use additional screws . SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 47 Mechanical installation 3.3 Mounting SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 48 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.1 4 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following: Establishing the electrical connections of the system Description of the customer connections for the power and signal connections Notes on the EMC compliant design DANGER This product can cause a direct current in the protective ground conductor. When a residual current device (RCD) or a residual current monitor (RCM) is used for protection in the event of direct or indirect contact, only an RCD or RCM of type B is permissible on the power supply side of this product. CAUTION Cable types Only lines/cables included in the specifications in Chapter Cable types (Page 179) may be used for wiring. 4.2 Checklist for electrical installation Use the following checklist to guide you through the electrical installation procedure for the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet. Read the "Safety instructions" section at the start of these Operating Instructions before you start working on the device and note these safety instructions during the work on the device. Check the box accordingly in the "present" column if the option applies to your scope of supply. In the same way, check the boxes once you have finished the installation procedure to confirm that the activities are complete. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 49 Electrical installation 4.2 Checklist for electrical installation Item Activity Yes Completed Power connections 1 The line-side and motor-side electric power cables and the cables for the auxiliary supply/supplies must be dimensioned and routed in accordance with the ambient and routing conditions. The correct and uniform phase sequence must be observed in both sub-cabinets when connecting cabinet units in parallel (applies to non-standard project-specific power expansion solutions). The protective conductor cross-section should be dimensioned according to the country-specific regulations for protective grounding conductors for equipment with a high leakage current. Refer to Chapter " Technical specifications (Page 134)" for the maximum possible connection cross-sections The motor protective conductor must be connected directly to the cabinet. The cables must be properly connected to the system connection points as per the type- and order-specific circuit diagram with the torque as specified in the table "Tightening torques for connecting current-conducting parts" in Chapter Technical specifications (Page 134) . The cables must also be connected to the motor and the low-voltage switchgear with the required torques. The cables must be identified uniquely and permanently with cable numbers and the cable numbers must be documented on the terminal diagram. 2 The cables between the low-voltage switchgear and the cabinet must be protected with line fuses to provide adequate conductor protection (DIN VDE 100, Part 430 and/or IEC 60364-4-43) The maximum permissible rated currents of the relevant fuses for power unit and auxiliary supply/supplies can be found in the Chapter Technical specifications (Page 134) or in the type- and order-specific circuit diagram. 3 For strain relief, the cables must be clamped on the cable propping bar (C-type mounting bar). 4 The cabinet must be properly grounded at the appropriate points (see Electrical Installation/ EMC-compliant design (Page 58)) 5 Main switch incl. For variants with a circuit breaker (950 A DC rated current), fuses/circuit breakers the triggering current must be set to match the installation requirements. See "Electrical installation / Power connections / Main switch incl. fuses/circuit breakers (Page 77). 6 Option L50 Cabinet lighting with service socket The 230 V auxiliary supply for the cabinet lighting with an integrated service socket must be connected to terminal X4.1 .2 and must be protected in the low-voltage switchgear with a max. 13 A fuse. See description of options. 7 Option L55 Cabinet anticondensation heating The 230 V auxiliary supply for the cabinet anti-condensation heating (power type-specific) must be connected to terminals -X4.3 .4 and must be protected in the low-voltage switchgear with a max. 16 A fuse. See description of options. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 50 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.2 Checklist for electrical installation Item Activity 8 Option A30 Motor anti -condensation heating 9 Option L05 Auxiliary supply 24 V DC The 230 V auxiliary supply for the motor anti-condensation heater (power type-specific) must be connected to terminals -X4.5 .6 and must be protected in the low-voltage switchgear with a max. 16 A fuse. Yes Completed See description of options. The 24 V auxiliary supply to supply power to the electronics of the converter equipment is connected to terminals X2.51 .52 and must be protected with a max. 16 A B- or Crated fuse. The load power is 1 A to 5 A depending on the number and types of the options used. See description of options. Note: Electrical separation is applied to all customer connections with input/output voltages in the range up to DC 60 V (DVC A) as per the requirements for protection against electric shock in EN61800-5-1. Only components with input/output voltages in this range that also have electrical separation may therefore by connected to these connections. 10 Motor fan 1 The cable to supply motor fan 1 must be connected to terminals -X3.3 .4 .5 and to the connecting terminals in the motor fan terminal box. Observe the correct phase sequence (do not forget to check the direction of rotation during commissioning!). The triggering current of the motor circuit breaker =F1-Q11 must be set as per the motor fan's type plate data and must be documented in the circuit diagram. 11 Motor fan 2 Options W70 to W91 The cable to supply motor fan 2 must be connected to terminals -X3.6 .7 .8 and to the connecting terminals in the motor fan's terminal box. Observe the correct phase sequence (do not forget to check the direction of rotation during commissioning!). The triggering current of the motor circuit breaker =F1-Q12 must be set as per the motor fan's type plate data and must be documented in the circuit diagram. Signal connections 19 System operation by higher-level controller / control room. The control lines and analog signal cables must be connected in accordance with the interface assignment. Taking into account electrical interference and the distance from power cables, the digital and analog signals must be routed with separate cables. The shields of the shielded cables must be placed close to the cabinet entry point over the entire area and with low impedance on the shield support bar provided. The shield must be routed without interruption up to the cable connection point. See Electrical Installation / EMC-compliant design (Page 58) and Electrical Installation / Signal connections (Page 80) and Electrical Installation / Other connections (Page 85). The cables must be identified uniquely and permanently with cable numbers. The cable numbers must be documented on the terminal diagram. 20 Combined fault Dry contact, customer terminal block -X2.1 .2 message "m.c.b. trip" See "Electrical Installation / Other connections (Page 85) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 51 Electrical installation 4.2 Checklist for electrical installation Item 21 Activity External E-STOP button Safety voltage ES/P24 to integrate an external NC contact for the E-STOP. A dedicated cable must be provided for this signal. Yes Completed Customer terminal block -X2.3 .4 See Electrical Installation / Other connections (Page 85) 22 DI reserve 230 V AC digital input (coupling relay) Customer terminal block =U1-XK-K11 See Electrical Installation / Other Connections / Input coupling relays (Page 87) 23 DI on/stop signal 230 V AC digital input (coupling relay) Customer terminal block =U1-XK-K12 See Electrical Installation / Other Connections / Input coupling relays (Page 87) 24 DI controller enable signal 230 V AC digital input (coupling relay) Customer terminal block =U1-XK-K13 See Electrical Installation / Other Connections / Input coupling relays (Page 87) 25 DI reserve 230 V AC digital input (coupling relay) Customer terminal block =U1-XK-K14 See Electrical Installation / Other Connections / Input coupling relays (Page 87) 26 27 DO signal Dry contact (coupling relay) SINAMICS DCM fault Customer terminal block =U1-XK-K15 DO reserve See Electrical Installation / Other Connections / Output coupling relays (Page 88) Dry contact (coupling relay) Customer terminal block =U1-XK-K16 See Electrical Installation / Other Connections / Output coupling relays (Page 88) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 52 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.2 Checklist for electrical installation Item 28 Activity Customer terminal block X71 The signals are connected to the terminals of the converter equipment's CUD by customer terminal block X71. The following interfaces are available: 4 digital inputs On delivery, 2 of these inputs are used as the control interface for the on signal and controller enable signal via a 230 V coupling relay. The two remaining inputs are available to the customer, also via a 230 V coupling relay. Customer terminals XK-K11 to XK-K14 are used to connect the customer to these coupling relays. 4 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs 4 digital outputs On delivery, one of these outputs is used internally to activate the unit and the motor fan. 2 additional digital outputs are provided at customer terminals XK-K15 and XK-K16 as dry contacts via coupling relay. 7 analog inputs 2 analog outputs 1 thermistor input 2-wire and 3-wire connection, KTY84-130 / PTC / NTC / PT100 / PT1000 Serial interface, peer-to-peer RS485 Incremental encoder input for actual speed value measurement Track 1 / Track 2 / zero mark / TTL and HTL / differential inputs Supply for incremental encoder 13.7 V to 15.2 V, 300 mA, short-circuit proof 10 V for setpoint generator; 10 mA, short-circuit proof Yes Completed 24 V for DI/DO; 200 mA, short-circuit proof Depending on the options, these inputs and outputs are used internally and are therefore not all available to the customer. See the specific circuit diagram of the purchased system for their actual use. See Electrical Installation / Signal connections (Page 80). 29 Analog tacho input Terminals XT1-103 and XT1-104 at the power interface of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter When an analog tacho is used to measure the actual speed value, the cable's shield is placed directly after the entry to the cabinet on the provided shield support bar and the cable is routed directly to input terminals XT1-103 and XT1-104 on the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter's power interface board in the provided cable duct without intermediate terminal and is connected. The shield is routed up to the connecting terminals without interruptions. The maximum permissible voltage at the input terminals is 270 V See Electrical Installation / Signal connections (Page 80) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 53 Electrical installation 4.2 Checklist for electrical installation Item 30 Activity Option G10 or option The signals are connected to the terminals of the converter G11 equipment's optional 2nd CUD via customer terminal block X72. The following interfaces are available: Customer terminal block X72 4 digital inputs 4 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs 4 digital outputs 7 analog inputs 2 analog outputs 1 thermistor input 2-wire and 3-wire connection, KTY84-130 / PTC / NTC / PT100 / PT1000 Serial interface, peer-to-peer RS485 Incremental encoder input for actual speed value measurement Track 1 / Track 2 / zero mark / TTL and HTL / differential inputs Supply for incremental encoder 13.7 V to 15.2 V, 300 mA, short-circuit proof 10 V for setpoint generator; 10 mA, short-circuit proof Yes Completed 24 V for DI/DO; 200 mA, short-circuit proof Depending on the options, these inputs and outputs are used internally and are therefore not all available to the customer. See the specific circuit diagram of the purchased system for their actual use. See description of options. 31 Option G60 Customer terminal block TM31 The TM31 Terminal Module is used to expand the customer terminals. The following additional interfaces are available: 8 digital inputs 4 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs 2 relay outputs with changeover contact 2 analog inputs 2 analog outputs 1 temperature sensor input (KTY84-130/PTC) Integration of the interfaces takes place using preinterconnections prepared in the factory, which can be selected during commissioning. When the analog inputs of the TM31 are used as current or voltage inputs, ensure that selector switches S5.0 and S5.1 are set accordingly. See SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Operating Instructions, Chapter 7. Depending on the options, these inputs and outputs are used internally and are therefore not all available to the customer. See the specific circuit diagram of the purchased system for their actual use. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 54 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.2 Checklist for electrical installation Item 32 Activity Option G62 Customer terminal block TM15 The TM15 Terminal Module is used to expand the customer terminals. Yes Completed The following additional interfaces are available: 24 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs in 3 mutually isolated groups of 8 DI/O Depending on the options, these inputs and outputs are used internally and are therefore not all available to the customer. See the specific circuit diagram of the purchased system for their actual use. See SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Operating Instructions, Chapter 7. 33 Option K50 Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30 The SMC30 Sensor Module can be used to record the speed and for position detection. The following encoders are supported by the SMC30 Sensor Module in conjunction with SINAMICS DCM: TTL encoder HTL encoder SSI absolute encoder The motor temperature can also be recorded using KTY84 130. On delivery, an HTL encoder is set bipolar with 1024 pulses per revolution. See SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Operating Instructions, Chapter 7. Connecting protection and monitoring devices 22 Option L45 See description of options. EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton installed in the cabinet door See also 230 V AC auxiliary supply (Page 79) 24 V DC auxiliary supply (Page 79) Required tools To install the connections, you will require: Wrench or socket wrench, width across the flats 10 to 19 Torque wrench, 5 to 100 Nm Screwdriver, size 1.5 to 7 Torx screwdrivers, T15 to T30 Phillips screwdriver, PH 1 to 3 Insulation stripper Crimping tool SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 55 Electrical installation 4.3 Important safety precautions 4.3 Important safety precautions WARNING SINAMICS DC MASTER Cabinets are operated at high voltages. All connection procedures must be carried out when the cabinet is de-energized. All work on the device must be carried out by trained personnel only. Non-observance of these warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury, or substantial property damage. Work on an open cabinet must be carried out with extreme caution because external supply voltages may be present. The power and control terminals may be live even when the motor is not running. Hazardous voltage is still present in SINAMICS DC MASTER DC Converter snubber capacitors in the cabinet after disconnecting. The cabinet may therefore only be handled following a 2 min wait time after it has been disconnected. The operator is responsible for ensuring that the motor, converter and other units are installed and connected in accordance with recognized engineering practice in the country of installation and in compliance with applicable regional regulations. Special attention should be paid to cable dimensioning, fuses, grounding, shutdown, disconnection, and overcurrent protection. If a safety device trips in a branch circuit, a fault current may have been disconnected. To reduce the risk of fire or an electric shock, the current-carrying parts and other components in the system should be inspected, and damaged parts replaced. When a safety device trips, the cause of the trip must be identified and rectified. CAUTION Only original DRIVE-CLiQ cables may be used for wiring the DRIVE-CLiQ nodes. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 56 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.4 Introduction to EMC 4.4 Introduction to EMC Note An introduction to the EMC can be found in Chapter 6 of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Operating Instructions. WARNING Electromagnetic fields "electro smog" Electromagnetic fields are generated by the operation of electrical power engineering installations such as transformers, converters or motors. Electromagnetic fields can interfere with electronic devices, which could cause them to malfunction. For example, the operation of heart pacemakers can be impaired, potentially leading to damage to a person's health or even death. It is therefore forbidden for persons with heart pacemakers to enter these areas. The plant operator is responsible for taking appropriate measures (labels and hazard warnings) to adequately protect operating personnel and others against any possible risk. Observe the relevant nationally applicable health and safety regulations. In Germany, "electromagnetic fields" are subject to regulations BGV B11 and BGR B11 stipulated by the German statutory industrial accident insurance institution. Display adequate warning notices (pacemaker symbol). Place barriers around hazardous areas. Take measures, e.g. using shields, to reduce electromagnetic fields at their source. Make sure that personnel are wearing the appropriate protective gear. Figure 4-1 Pacemaker symbol SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 57 Electrical installation 4.5 EMC-compliant design 4.5 EMC-compliant design The following section provides some basic information and guidelines that will help you comply with the EMC and CE guidelines. These refer to the connection in the cabinet and to the cabling outside the cabinet. Shield supports Bare shielded cables as appropriate and attach them in the cabinet using shield springs or ground them reliably to bare metal surfaces. Two-ended shield support is recommended. Laying the motor supply cable separately The distance between the motor cable and the signal cables should be >20 cm. If it is unavoidable that motor cables and signal cables are laid in parallel over long distances, the motor cables must be twisted or a shielded motor cable must be used. Cable installation Cables that are subject to or sensitive to interference should be laid as far apart from each other as possible. All cables must be laid as close as possible to grounded enclosure parts such as mounting plates or the cabinet frame. This reduces both radiation of electromagnetic waves and interference coupling. Use the provided cable ducts in the cabinet. Reserve cores of signal and data cables must be grounded at both ends to achieve an additional shielding effect. Shorten long cables or lay them at points that are not sensitive to interference to avoid additional connecting points. If it is impossible to avoid crossing cables, conductors or cables that carry signals of different classes must cross at right angles, especially if they carry sensitive signals that are subject to interference. - Class 1: unshielded cables for 60 V DC unshielded cables for 25 V AC shielded analog signal cables shielded bus and data cables operator panel interfaces, incremental/absolute encoder lines - Class 2: unshielded cables for >60 V DC and 240 V DC unshielded cables for >25 V AC and 240 V AC - Class 3: unshielded cables for >240 V AC/DC and 1000 V AC/DC SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 58 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.5 EMC-compliant design Shield connection Bare shielded cables as appropriate and attach them in the cabinet using shield springs. Shields must not be used to conduct electricity. In other words, they must not simultaneously act as neutral or PE conductors. Outside the cabinet: Attach shields over the greatest possible area of contact. You can use ground clamps, ground terminals, or ground screw connections. Avoid extending the shield to the grounding point by means of a wire (pigtail) which significantly reduces the effectiveness of the shield for high frequencies. Attach the shields to a shield bus at the point immediately after the cables enter the cabinet. Bare the shielded cable as appropriate and reattach it to the device connection. The shields must be uninterrupted. I/O interfacing Create the ground connection to additional control cabinets, system components and distributed units with the largest possible cross-section or using the connecting pieces provided. Ground unused cables at one end at least in the control cabinet. Select the largest distance between the power and signal cables, and at least 20 cm. The following applies: The longer the parallel laying, the greater the distance. If the distance cannot be maintained, you must provide additional shielding measures. Avoid unnecessarily long conducting loops. Filtering cables Line supply cables and power supply cables for devices and modules may have to be filtered in the cabinet to reduce incoming or outgoing interference along the cable. Filters to comply with interference emission limit values of category C2 in accordance with EN 61800-3 or category A1 in accordance with EN 55011 (CISPR 11) are available as option L00. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 59 Electrical installation 4.6 Cable routing 4.6 Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. The possibility of attaching cables to the struts and beams of the cabinet or to the rails provided and the possibility of connecting the shield are also shown in the diagrams. 4.6.1 Armature AC )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H&& 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQFDEOHWLHEDVH 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQFDEOHFODPS Figure 4-2 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 60 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.6 Cable routing )UDPHVL]H'&$ )UDPHVL]H'&$ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 4-3 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Cable routing (2) )UDPHVL]HV(&)& 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQFDEOHFODPS Figure 4-4 Cable routing (3) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 61 Electrical installation 4.6 Cable routing 4.6.2 DC armature )UDPHVL]H&& )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H'&$ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ &DEOHWLHEDVH 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ &DEOHFODPS Figure 4-5 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 62 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.6 Cable routing )UDPHVL]H'&$ )UDPHVL]HV(&)& 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 4-6 :KHQXVLQJVKHDWKHG FDEOHVRQO\UHPRYHWKH VKHDWKIURPWKHWRSPRVW VWUDLQUHOLHIEDU 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQFDEOHFODPS Cable routing (2) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 63 Electrical installation 4.6 Cable routing 4.6.3 Infeed AC auxiliary power supply )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H&& 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQFDEOHFODPS 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQFDEOHWLHEDVH Figure 4-7 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 64 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.6 Cable routing )UDPHVL]H'& )UDPHVL]HV(&)& :KHQXVLQJVKHDWKHG FDEOHVRQO\UHPRYHWKH VKHDWKIURPWKHWRSPRVW VWUDLQUHOLHIEDU 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 4-8 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQFDEOHFODPS 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQFDEOHWLHEDVH Cable routing (2) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 65 Electrical installation 4.6 Cable routing 4.6.4 Field DC )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H&& 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQFDEOHWLHEDVH 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQFDEOHFODPS Figure 4-9 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 66 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.6 Cable routing )UDPHVL]HV(&)& )UDPHVL]H'& 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ :KHQXVLQJVKHDWKHG FDEOHVRQO\UHPRYHWKH VKHDWKIURPWKHWRSPRVW VWUDLQUHOLHIEDU 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQFDEOHWLHEDVH 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQFDEOHFODPS Figure 4-10 Cable routing (2) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 67 Electrical installation 4.6 Cable routing 4.6.5 Terminal Module Cabinet (TMC) )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H&& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWHOHPHQWDQGVWUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 4-11 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 68 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.6 Cable routing )UDPHVL]H'& )UDPHVL]HV(&)& 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ Figure 4-12 Cable routing (2) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 69 Electrical installation 4.6 Cable routing 4.6.6 Analog tachometer )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H&& 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQDORQJWKHVWUXWDQGYHUWLFDO IUDPHFDEOHWLHEDVH Figure 4-13 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQDORQJWKHVWD\DQGYHUWLFDO IUDPH Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 70 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.6 Cable routing )UDPHVL]H'& $ $ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQDORQJWKHVWD\DQGYHUWLFDOIUDPH Figure 4-14 Cable routing (2) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 71 Electrical installation 4.6 Cable routing )UDPHVL]HV(&)& 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQDORQJWKHVWD\DQG YHUWLFDOIUDPH Figure 4-15 Cable routing (3) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 72 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.6 Cable routing 4.6.7 Terminal strip X2 )UDPHVL]HV%&&& )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ Figure 4-16 Cable routing SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 73 Electrical installation 4.6 Cable routing 4.6.8 Terminals XK, input and output coupling relay )UDPHVL]HV%&&& )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 4-17 Cable routing SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 74 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.7 Power connections 4.7 Power connections WARNING Swapping the input and output terminals may destroy the SINAMICS DCM. The excitation coils of contactors and relays that are connected to the same supply network as the device must be connected to surge suppressors, e.g.. RC elements. 4.7.1 Overview Depending on the frame size and the required conductor cross-section, the customer connections are designed as modular terminal blocks or for fixing terminal ends. Table 4- 1 Customer connections Armature circuit infeed Connections Rated current Connection point for systems without line filter Connection point for systems with line filter (option) Infeed (3 AC) 15 A-280 A Terminal end at the main switch Terminal strip -X0 (L1, L2, L3) 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 400 A-600 A Terminal end at the main switch Terminal end at the filter 720 A-850 A Terminal end at the main switch Customer connection terminal end 950 A-3,000 A Customer connection terminal end Customer connection terminal end Connections Rated current Connection point for systems without line filter Infeed (3 AC) 15 A-850 A Terminal end at auxiliary incoming Terminal strip -X1 (L1, L2, L3) feeder circuit breaker 950 A-3,000 A Terminal strip -X1 (L1, L2, L3) Connections Rated current Connection point Output (DC) 60 A-3000 A, 2Q Terminal end at the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter 1C1, 1D1 15 A-850 A, 4Q Terminal end at the motor connection, DC fuse 950 A-3000 A, 4Q Terminal end at the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Auxiliary supply infeed L1, L2, L3 Connection point for systems with line filter (option) Terminal strip -X1 (L1, L2, L3) Motor armature connection Motor field terminal Connections Connection point Output (DC) 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 (.1, .2) 4.7.2 Connection cross-sections The specified connection cross-sections and tightening torques for mains connection, motor connection and grounding can be found in the tables in Chapter Technical specifications (Page 134) . SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 75 Electrical installation 4.7 Power connections 4.7.3 Connecting the motor and power cables Note For the location of the connections, see the layout diagrams. 1. Open the cabinet and, if necessary, remove the covers in front of the connection panel for motor cables and power supply cables. 2. Remove or slide open the bottom plate below the connection panel to feed in the motor cables and power supply cables. 3. Screw the protective earth (PE) to the corresponding connection with the ground symbol at the specified points in the cabinet (tightening torque from the table as per Technical Data, e.g. 50 Nm for M12). 4. Screw the motor cables to the connections and screw and connect the power supply cables (tightening torque from the table as per Technical Data, e.g. 50 Nm for M12). Table 4- 2 Terminal strip X0 - connection for armature circuit 3 AC infeed Terminal Designation Technical specification 1 L1 3 AC armature circuit infeed 2 L2 3 L3 PE - Protective conductor Terminal type and the maximum connectable cross-section depends on the cabinet type; see Technical Data. Table 4- 3 Terminal strip X1 - connection for standard 3 AC auxiliary supply Terminal Designation Technical specification 1 L1 3 AC auxiliary supply infeed 2 L2 3 L3 PE - Protective conductor Terminal type and the maximum connectable cross-section depends on the cabinet type; see Technical Data. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 76 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.7 Power connections Table 4- 4 Terminal strip X3 - connection for DC field output Terminal Designation Technical specification 1 - Motor excitation outgoing circuit 2 - PE - Protective conductor Terminal type and the maximum connectable cross-section depends on the cabinet type; see Technical Data. CAUTION Tighten the screws with the required torque. Otherwise, the connection contacts may catch fire in operation. The terminal type can be found in Chapter Technical specifications (Page 134). The tightening torque for the terminal types used can be found in the appendix. Note The motor ground conductor must be connected directly to the cabinet. 4.7.4 Main switch incl. fuses/circuit breakers A switch-disconnector fuse is installed as main switch in systems with a rated armature current up to 850 A. For rated currents above 950 A, the standard circuit breaker is used to disconnect the voltage and provide overload and short-circuit protection. CAUTION Switching at input Systems with circuit breakers may be switched on max. every 3 min. Failure to observe this rule can cause damage to the circuit breaker. DANGER With a live mains voltage, dangerous voltages are present in the cabinet unit even when the switch-disconnector or circuit breaker is open. The upstream safety device must be deenergized when working on the system. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 77 Electrical installation 4.7 Power connections Setting the triggering current for the circuit breaker In equipment with a circuit breaker, the triggering current must be set to match the plant requirements. The appropriate specifications are given in the operating instructions supplied with the circuit breaker. Table 4- 5 Overcurrent release factory setting MLFB Output current Overcurrent trip (L) Short-circuit trip, nondelayed (I) 6RM8088-6L.. 950 A 0.8 2 6RM8090-6K.. 1.000 A 0.85 2 6RM8090-6G.. 1.100 A 1.0 2 6RM8091-6... 1.200 A 1.0 2 6RM8093-4D.. 1.600 A 0.85 2 6RM8093-4G.. 1.600 A 0.85 2 6RM8093-4K.. 1.500 A 1.0 2 6RM8093-4L.. 1.500 A 1.0 2 6RM8095-4D.. 2.000 A 0.85 2 6RM8095-4G.. 2.000 A 0.85 2 6RM8095-4K.. 2.000 A 0.85 2 6RM8095-4L.. 1.900 A 0.8 2 6RM8096-4G.. 2.200 A 1.0 2 6RM8096-4M.. 2.200 A 1.0 2 6RM8097-4G.. 2.800 A 1.0 2 6RM8097-4K.. 2.600 A 0.9 2 6RM8098-4D.. 2.800 A 1.0 2 NOTICE If the triggering current is not set correctly, the circuit breaker could trip inadvertently or even fail to trip. Diagnostics Information on messages that occur during operation and in the event of faults at the circuit breaker can be found in the documentation in the "Supplementary operating instructions" directory. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 78 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.8 External supply 4.8 External supply As standard, the cabinet is supplied with an auxiliary voltage of 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz, with clockwise rotating field, TN or TT line supply and grounded transformer neutral point. If option V60, line frequency 60 Hz, is selected, the auxiliary voltage must be 3-ph 460 V AC. Other auxiliary voltages must be ordered using option Y04. The auxiliary voltage may not exceed 690 V. The auxiliary power supply must be secured on the line-side against shortcircuit and overload. If there is no auxiliary power supply available, this electric circuit is taken from from the ACside armature circuit. This must be ordered with option Y03. The armature circuit supply must not exceed 690 V. Note Selecting option Y03 or Y04 can lead to an increase in the outside dimensions. Other variants are offered as an engineering solution. 4.8.1 230 V AC auxiliary supply As standard, no additional 230 V AC auxiliary supply is required. If it is required to operate the SINAMICS DCM, it is transformed inside the cabinet via an auxiliary voltage transformer from the 400 V AC auxiliary supply. A 230 V AC auxiliary supply is only required for some options (e.g. L50 or L55). The required customer protection depends on the application; terminal blocks are in place for connection in the cabinet. The connection is protected inside the cabinet with a 10 A fuse. This auxiliary supply is required for option L50 "Cabinet lighting", option L55 "Cabinet heating" and option A30 "Motor heating". The connection is made to terminal strip -X4 The terminals 1, 2 are for option L50, terminals 3, 4 are for option L55 and terminals 5, 6 are for option A30. If several of these options are chosen at the same time, terminals 1-3-5 or 24-6 can also be combined by the customer with wire jumpers. 4.8.2 24 V DC auxiliary supply As standard, no additional 24 V DC auxiliary supply is required; this supply is only required for option L07. The required customer protection depends on the application. Modular terminal block are in place for connection in the cabinet. The connection is to terminal strip -X2 on terminals 51 and 52. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 79 Electrical installation 4.9 Signal connections 4.9 Signal connections Note The options for configuring and parameterizing the signal connections of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter are described in the SINAMICS DCM List Manual (parameter list and function diagrams). NOTICE All cables/lines laid within the cabinet must be routed in the intended cable ducts. 4.9.1 Terminal Module Cabinet (TMC) A7119 terminal strip X71 or X72 (with option G10, G11) Note The default settings and the description of the Terminal Module Cabinet (TMC) are documented in the circuit diagrams. The position of the Terminal Module Cabinet (TMC) inside the cabinet is documented in the layout diagram. Shield support The shield support of shielded control cables on the Terminal Module Cabinet (TMC) A7119 is established in the immediate vicinity of the module. For this purpose, the mounting plates have cutout sections which are used to snap the supplied shield springs into place. The shields of incoming and outgoing cables must be applied directly to these shield supports. It is important here to establish the greatest possible area of contact and a good conductive connection. Note These shield springs can be used for all control cables in the cabinet unit, as all the shield supports are identical in design. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 80 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.9 Signal connections Figure 4-18 Shield support Overview Figure 4-19 Terminal Module Cabinet (TMC) A7119 (X71 / X72) Terminal type SPT 1,5; for connection capacity, see Chapter Connectable conductor crosssections for screw terminals (Page 293) in the appendix. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 81 Electrical installation 4.9 Signal connections U U # # # 7; 7; 5; 5; # 6XSSO\ 3B6 P$PD[ 0 ,QFUHPHQWDO HQFRGHU 'LJLWDOLQSXWV ZLUHGWRWKH FRXSOLQJUHOD\ U U $QDORJLQSXWV 6HULDOLQWHUIDFH SHHUWRSHHU Typical connections 7UDFN 7UDFN =HURPDUN 0GLJLWDO %$ 0 3 bP$PD[ 'LJLWDO LQSXWVRXWSXWV $QDORJLQSXWV 0DLQVHWSRLQW 2)) (QDEOH 8, 8, U 0GLJLWDO U 3 U 0RWRU WHPSHUDWXUH 'LJLWDORXWSXWV # U 3 U $QDORJ RXWSXWV # # 0DQDORJ VHQVH P$ 0DQDORJ 3B6 P$PD[ 0GLJLWDO # # 3sP$ 1sP$ 0DQDORJ 5HVHUYHGIRUIDQFDELQHWIDQDFWLYDWLRQ 3UHZLUHGWRWKHFRXSOLQJUHOD\ %$ HOHFWURQLFDOO\VZLWFKDEOHEXVWHUPLQDWLRQ 9, HOHFWURQLFDOO\VZLWFKDEOHYROWDJHFXUUHQWLQSXW Figure 4-20 Connection diagram of the TMC with typical connections Assignment of terminal strip X71 or X72 The binary and analog inputs and outputs and the incremental encoder input of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter can be connected via terminal strips X71 and X72. X72 is only available in versions with option G10 or G11. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 82 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.9 Signal connections Table 4- 6 Terminal X71 / X72 assignment (1st block) Function Technical data Analog inputs (assignable inputs) 1 2 AI 3 + AI 3 - Analog input 3 3 4 AI 4 + AI 4 - Analog input 4 5 6 AI 5 + AI 5 - Analog input 5 7 8 AI 6 + AI 6 - Analog input 6 Input type (signal type): Differential input 10 V; 150 k Resolution approx. 5.4 mV (11 bits) Common-mode controllability: 15 V Digital inputs (assignable inputs) 9 10 24 V DC 24 V supply (output) 24 VDC, short-circuit proof Max. load 200 mA (terminals 9 and 10 together), internal supply related to internal ground terminal 11 DI 0 Digital input 0 12 DI 1 Digital input 1 13 DI 2 Digital input 2 H signal: +15 to +30 V L signal: -30 V to +5 V or terminal open 8.5 mA at 24 V 14 DI 3 Digital input 3 Digital inputs/outputs (assignable inputs/outputs) 15 DI/ DO 4 Digital input /output 4 16 DI/ DO 5 Digital input /output 5 17 DI/ DO 6 Digital input /output 6 18 DI/ DO 7 Digital input /output 7 Type, input/output parameterizable Features of inputs: H signal: +15 to +30 V L signal: 0 V to +5 V or terminal open 8.5 mA at 24 V Features of outputs: H signal: +20 V to +26 V L signal: 0 to +2 V short-circuit proof; max. current carrying capacity: 100 mA per DO; max. total load of all DO (CUD left X177:15-22 + CUD right X177:1522): 800 mA internal protection circuit (freewheeling diode) If overload occurs: alarm A60018 19 DO 0 Digital output 0 20 DO 1 Digital output 1 21 DO 2 Digital output 2 22 DO 3 Digital output 3 23, 24 MDIG Ground, digital H signal: +20 V to +26 V L signal: 0 to +2 V short-circuit proof; max. current carrying capacity: 100 mA per DO; max. total load of all DO (CUD left X177:15-22 + CUD right X177:1522): 800 mA internal protection circuit (freewheeling diode) If overload occurs: alarm A60018 Analog inputs, setpoint inputs (assignable inputs) 25 26 AI 0 + AI 0 - Analog input 0 Main setpoint 27 28 AI 1 + AI 1 - Analog input 1 Input type (signal type), parameterizable: - Differential input 10 V; 150 k - Current input 0 - 20 mA; 300 or 4 - 20 mA; 300 Resolution approx. 0.66 mV (14 bits) Common-mode controllability: 15 V SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 83 Electrical installation 4.9 Signal connections Terminal Function 29 30 AI 2 + AI 2 - Technical data Analog input 2 Input type (signal type): - Differential input 10 V; 150 k Resolution approx. 0.66 mV (14 bits) Common-mode controllability: 15 V Note: An external armature voltage actual value can also be connected at this input. See function diagram 6902 in the SINAMICS DCM List Manual. Reference voltage 31 32 P10 N10 Reference voltage 10 V (output) 33, 34 MANA Ground, analog Table 4- 7 Terminal Tolerance 1% at 25 C Stability 0.1% per 10 K 10 mA short-circuit proof X71 / X72 assignment (2nd block) Function Technical data Serial interface, peer-to-peer RS485 35, 36 MDIG Ground, digital 37 TX+ Send cable + 4-wire send cable, positive differential output 38 TX- Send cable - 4-wire send cable, negative differential output 39 RX+ Receive cable + 4-wire receive cable, positive differential output 40 RX- Receive cable - 4-wire receive cable, negative differential output Incremental encoder input 41 Incremental encoder supply 42 Incremental encoder ground 43 Track 1 positive connection 44 Track 1 negative connection 45 Track 2 positive connection 46 Track 2 negative connection 47 Zero mark positive connection 48 Zero mark negative connection +13.7 to +15.2 V, 300 mA short-circuit proof (electronically protected) If overload occurs: alarm A60018 Load: 5.25 mA at 15 V (without switching losses) Pulse duty factor: 1:1 For information on cables, cable length, shield support, input pulse levels, hysteresis, track and pulse frequency, see SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Operating Instructions Analog outputs (assignable outputs) 49 AO 0 Analog output 0 50 MANA Ground, analog 51 AO 1 Analog output 1 52 MANA Ground, analog 10 V, max. 2 mA short-circuit proof, resolution 15 bits Connections for temperature sensor (motor interface 1) 53 Temp 1 54 Temp 2 (sense cable) Sensor acc. to p50490 (refer to SINAMICS DCM List Manual The cable to the temperature sensor on the motor must be shielded SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 84 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.10 Other connections Terminal Function 55 Temp 3 Technical data and connected to ground at both ends. The cables for the Temp 1 and Temp 3 connections to the temperature sensor must be approximately the same length. The sense cable (Temp 2) is used for compensating the cable resistances. If you are not using a sense cable, terminals 54 and 55 must be connected. VHQVH Connection without/with sense cable: ; ; 7HPS7HPS7HPS7HPS7HPS7HPS Terminals for ground and 24 V DC supply 56 MANA Ground, analog 57, 58, 59, 60 24 V D C 24 V supply (output) 61, 62, 63, 64 MDIG Ground, digital 24 V DC, short-circuit proof Max. load 200 mA (terminals 9, 10, 57, 58, 59 and 60 combined), internal supply to digital ground and analog ground 4.10 Other connections Depending on the options installed, further connections have to be established, e.g. connection for external auxiliary equipment, main contactor/circuit breaker, cabinet illumination with service socket, cabinet anti-condensation heating, contactor safety combinations (EMERGENCY OFF / EMERGENCY STOP), thermistor motor protection unit, temperature evaluation unit, insulation monitor, communication modules and encoder evaluation. For detailed information about the interconnection of individual options with interfaces, see the documentation. NOTICE All cables/lines laid within the cabinet must be routed in the intended cable ducts. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 85 Electrical installation 4.10 Other connections 4.10.1 Analog tachometer connection The connection is located on the "Power Interface" module of the SINAMICS DC MASTER DC Converter. The cable's shield is placed directly after the entry to the cabinet on the provided shield support bar and the cable is routed and connected directly to input terminals XT1-103 and XT1-104 on the power interface board without intermediate terminal. The shield is routed up to the connecting terminals without interruptions. The maximum permissible voltage at the input terminals is 270 V. Table 4- 8 Terminal strip XT1 on the SINAMICS DCM Terminal Function Technical data XT1-103 Tachometer connection 8 to 270 V XT1-104 Ground, analog 270 V Input resistance 159 k Resolution 14 bits Module C98043-A7105 / A7107 Power Interface 400 V - 600 V or C98043-A7106 / A7108 Power Interface 690 V - 950 V 4.10.2 m.c.b. trip combined alarm signal The signaling contacts of the circuit breakers and motor circuit breakers installed in the control cabinet are combined in a notification chain and the resulting "No m.c.b. trip" signal to terminals is provided floating. Table 4- 9 Terminal strip X2 - connection for m.c.b. trip combined alarm signal Terminal Designation Technical data 1 - 2 - Dry contacts for 24 V DC up to max. 230 V AC Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm2 CAUTION When the combined alarm signal is activated, the system must be brought to a safe state in (shutdown). SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 86 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Electrical installation 4.10 Other connections 4.10.3 External E-STOP button Terminals are available at which an external push button (form B contact) can be integrated into the E-STOP circuit. This contact must be floating, since the electrical circuit is supplied by a special safety voltage ES/P24 from the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter. These connections can be omitted if option L57 (Emergency Off) or L59 (Emergency Stop) is selected. Table 4- 10 Terminal strip X2 - connection for E-STOP button Terminal Designation Technical data 3 - 4 - Electrical circuit 24 V DC ES/P24 Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm2 Note The E-STOP function is not an EMERGENCY OFF function in the sense of EN 60204-1. 4.10.4 Input coupling relays Four binary inputs of the SINAMICS DC MASTER Converter CU1/-X177:11...14 are provided for the customer via input coupling relays =U1-XK-K11...-K14 for external activation. The relays are executed as terminal relays. This means that it is possible to connect the customer cables directly to these terminals -XK. As standard, the coupling relays are designed for a coil control voltage of 230 V AC or, with option C51, for 24 V DC. The function of the relays -K11 and -K14 is user defined; the relay K12 is assigned the ON/STOP function, the relay -K13 is assigned "controller enable". Table 4- 11 Terminals -XK - connection for input coupling relays Terminal Designation Technical data -K11:A1 - -K11:A2 - Not assigned, for customer 230 V AC -K12:A1 - -K12:A2 - -K13:A1 - -K13:A2 - -K14:A1 - -K14:A1 - ON/STOP 230 V AC Controller enable signal 230 V AC Not assigned, for customer 230 V AC Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm2 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 87 Electrical installation 4.11 Connecting the options 4.10.5 Output coupling relays One binary output of the SINAMICS DC MASTER DC Converter, CU1/-X177:20, is provided for the customer via output coupling relay =U1-XK-K15 and its floating changeover contact. The relay is designed as a terminal relay. This means that it is possible to connect the customer cables directly to these terminals -XK. The function of the relay is user defined, whereby the device fault message is preset. With option Y60, additional output coupling replays can be ordered. Table 4- 12 Terminals -XK - connection for output coupling relays Terminal Designation Technical data -K15:11 Basis SINAMICS DCM fault -K15:12 NC contact -K15:14 NO contact Maximum switching voltage: 250 V AC/DC, continuous limit current 6 A Disconnection power (ohmic load), max 140 W at 24 V DC 1500 VA at 250 V AC Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm2 4.11 Connecting the options The specifications for connecting the options (if required) can be found in the descriptions of the options. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 88 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Commissioning 5 WARNING This system is at a hazardous voltage level and contains dangerous rotating machine parts (fans). For this reason, you must follow the danger notices listed in the Operating Instructions of the installed components for commissioning and the safety instructions in Chapter 1 of these Operating Instructions. Failure to comply with the instructions can result in death, serious physical injury, and material damage. Note The SINAMICS DC MASTER includes internal overload protection for the motor. The description can be found in the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Operating Instructions. The built-in components must be brought into operation to commission the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet. The descriptions regarding how to do this can be found in the corresponding Operating Instructions. The SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Operating Instructions also describe how to use the AOP30 advanced operator panel and the STARTER commissioning tool. The following instructions describe how to commission the basic version of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet without options. Preconditions The SINAMICS DCM Cabinet must be grounded in accordance with with EN 61800-5-1 Point 4.3.5 (protection against indirect contact) on the provided grounding bar. The company carrying out installation may be required to carry out and keep a record of a ground resistance measurement, as described in IEC60364-6 Appendix B. For reasons of safety, you should install a device in the vicinity of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet that can be used to disconnect the upstream circuit breaker instantly in case of danger, before connecting the power supply for the first time. The cable glands in the cabinet must be sealed. All the necessary connections (main circuit, auxiliary circuits, tacho, etc. ) must be established. Supply voltages are connected. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 89 Commissioning Adjustments with a tool (e.g. screwdriver) must only be carried out in a safe (deenergized) condition; see Chapter Maintenance and servicing (Page 111) "Cabinet in safe condition". WARNING The barriers inside the cabinet do not provide protection against the ingress of tools The D3-Q12 disconnector for the auxiliary voltage locks the cabinet door in energized state. For the duration of the commissioning, this lock can be bypassed for necessary adjustments, measurements, etc. in the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet: WARNING For multi-section cabinets, the cabinet fields of the power module (doors without main switch) may only be opened in a "safe condition". There is no interlock. WARNING When the cabinet doors are open, live parts are not sufficiently protected against direct contact under certain circumstances. The standard EN 50110-1 (Operation of Electrical Installations) must be observed. Temporarily bypassing the interlock: 1. Shut down the drive 2. Turn off the main switch on the cabinet door (=D3-Q12) Switching off the auxiliary supply de-energizes the main contactor or the circuit breaker. 3. Open the cabinet door. 4. Secure the power unit against reconnection For systems with main contactor, switch off the power unit disconnector (=D3-Q11), for systems with circuit breaker, interlock the circuit breaker (=D3-Q11) 5. Turn on the auxiliary supply Attach a suitable tool (e.g. open-ended wrench with width across flats of 13 mm) to the axle of the auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker and rotate it to ON position. 6. Carry out adjustment and parameterization work 7. Switch off the auxiliary supply Attach a suitable tool (e.g. open-ended wrench with width across flats of 13 mm) to the axle of the auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker and rotate it to OFF position. 8. Override the power module's lockout device 9. Close the cabinet door SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 90 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Commissioning Switch on Switch on the 400 V AC (460 V) auxiliary supply - disconnector D3-Q12: Insert disconnector D3-Q12 with suitable mechanical aids when the doors are open. Switch on the armature infeed - D3-Q11 (switch-disconnector fuse or motor-tripped circuit breaker) - For systems with a rated current of up to 850 A, bring the 3KL switch-disconnector fuses (D3-Q11) to ON Position. This switch disconnector contains the semiconductor fuses, which must be connected upstream of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter. - For systems with a rated current of 950 A, bring the motor-tripped circuit breaker (D3-Q11) to ON position (the semiconductor fuses are integrated into the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter). Preparatory measures SINAMICS DCM DC Converter is in the "Factory setting" status Circuit breaker for the control voltage transformer (D5-T11) and device fans (D5-F14 for 1-ph fans, F1-Q13 for 3-ph fans) are set up in the factory Circuit breaker F1-Q11 for the motor fan set according to the motor fan data The output for the motor fan (-X3:3,4,5) is switched on concurrently with the device fan. Before commissioning the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, ventilation of the converter must be guaranteed: Units with a rated DC current of 280 A either have a fan internally or fans supplied internally by the unit. Units with a rated current of 400 A have fans that are supplied externally. The fans are switched on and off via the binary output DO 0 (-X177:19) of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter. This binary output must be parameterized in advance, otherwise the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter will turn off again after switching on with F60167 ("Fan speed too low" fault) again fails. Procedure: - Set parameter p50771 to r53135.0 (device fan state: switch on fan) (with AOP30 or STARTER). - The fan run-on time (factory setting = 240 s) can also be changed with p50096. - Then perform the RAMROM copy operation. This procedure also applies to units up to 280 A rated DC current. However, only the motor fan is then switched using DO 0. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 91 Commissioning Note Parameter settings with the AOP30 As the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter is in factory setting condition, the AOP30 displays the message "First commissioning necessary: wizard starting" after initialization. Follow the following procedure: Switch to parameter assignment mode Change the desired parameter settings Perform the RAMROM copy operation Switch back to the "drive commissioning" mode NOTICE Check direction of rotation of the fan Before commissioning, check the direction of rotation of the fan: Start up the fan briefly, e.g. by pressing fan contactor F1-Q13, and check the direction of rotation as the fan runs down. Correct direction of rotation: counterclockwise as seen from above clockwise as seen from below (when the front cover of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter has been removed) If the fan is rotating in the wrong direction, change the phase sequence of the 400 V auxiliary supply at terminals -X1: 1, 2, 3 and check the direction of rotation again. Description of other functions Four input relays (electrical isolation) 230 V AC is used for activation U1-K11 Freely available U1-K12 Preassigned for ON command U1-K13 Preassigned for operating enable U1-K14 Freely available If the ON and operating enable commands of the SINAMICS DCM are also to run via the bus, please note that there is an AND logic operation between each of these commands and the function of U1-K12 and U1-K13. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 92 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Commissioning E-STOP button in cabinet door A black button is located in the control cabinet door initiates voltage disconnection of the power outputs when it is pressed, equivalent to the OFF2 function. The SINAMICS DCM DC Converter switches to operating state o10.3. The button is latched mechanically when it is pressed and releases when it is pulled. No automatic restart occurs when you pull out the button. External buttons for remote-controlled tripping can be connected at terminals -X4:1 and X4:2. If there is no external button, terminals 1-2 must be jumped. Commissioning the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter with the AOP30 advanced operator panel The procedure is described in Chapter 8.3 of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Operating Instructions. Commissioning the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter with the STARTER commissioning tool The procedure is described in Chapter 8.4 of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Operating Instructions. Commissioning options Commission is required for options under certain circumstances. The relevant instructions can be found in the descriptions of the options or the enclosed device descriptions. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 93 Commissioning SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 94 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 6 Operation The following operator controls are built into the cabinet door: AOP30 Advanced Operator Panel Detailed information on operation (incl. fundamentals and control via the AOP30 advanced operator panel) can be found in the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Operating Instructions under the Chapter "Operation". Control voltage switch Switching on the control voltage switch activates the auxiliary supply in the cabinet. All components in the cabinet and all outgoing feeders, e.g. for the motor fan, are then supplied with voltage. If the control voltage switch is in "I" position , the cabinet door can no longer be opened. Disconnecting the control voltage switch ensures that no voltages are fed downstream of the control voltage switch or the main contactor (circuit breaker). NOTICE Disconnecting the control voltage switch in operation can cause contactors to drop out and fuse components to be disconnected. E-STOP button The button is locked when pressed and is unlocked when it is pulled out. Response when the pushbutton is pressed: Pressing the button causes immediate, hardware-determined disconnection of the main contactor or circuit breaker. Disconnection occurs independently of semiconductor devices and independently of any faulty functionality in the control electronics or in the power module of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter. The display of operating state on the AOP30 advanced operator panel changes to "OFF2". If an E-STOP occurs in operation status, the display changes operating state to "Switching On Inhibited". The display of operating state on the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter changes to 10.3. If an E-STOP occurs in operation status, the display changes operating mode to 8.0. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 95 Operation Reconnecting: Unlock button Cancel the ON command reconnect NOTICE The E-STOP function is not an EMERGENCY OFF function in the sense of EN 60204-1. Note Especially in the converter's regenerative feedback mode and at high levels of inductance, pressing the button can lead to shoot-throughs and therefore to tripping of fuse elements. This is accepted to ensure as rapid disconnection of voltage as possible in case of danger. Note The internal E-STOP processes are described in Chapter 10 of the SINAMIC DCM DC Converter Operating Instructions. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 96 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Functions, monitoring and protective functions 7.1 7 Overview of the functions This chapter describes the functions that are not described in other parts of the supplied documentation. The functions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter converter unit are described in detail in the relevant Operating Instructions, in the associated List Manual and in the Function Manual "Free function blocks". The functions of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet provided by the options are described in the document "SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Description of options". The underlying electrical circuit concept and the type-dependent variants of the electrical versions of the converter cabinet standard types without options can be viewed in the singlepole schematic circuit diagrams. 7.2 Scope of supply Supply components The basic version of SINAMICS DC MASTER Cabinet is a type-tested and ready-to-connect system to operate a separately excited DC motor on a line-commutated converter. The basic version is designed to operate on a TN-S or TN-C network. The following main components are included in addition to the SINAMICS DC MASTER DC Converter: Line connection Main switch Line reactors Semiconductor fuses Main contactor or circuit breaker (power-dependent) Control voltage transformers Circuit breakers and motor circuit breakers for auxiliaries AOP30 advanced operator panel PROFIBUS port Interface to the higher-level analog and digital control and monitoring system of the plant Interface for detecting the actual motor values (speed, temperature) Cabinet fan (power-dependent) In addition to the basic version, numerous options make it possible to adapt the converter cabinet optimally to the plant requirements and to other line system configurations. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 97 Functions, monitoring and protective functions 7.2 Scope of supply Note Fault current and insulation monitoring The basic version does not include fault current monitors; they can be ordered as an option (L82 for grounded networks). Insulation monitoring must be installed for use in non-grounded IT networks in accordance with the applicable regulations. Options L87 or L88 are available for this purpose. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 98 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Functions, monitoring and protective functions 7.3 Block diagrams 7.3 Block diagrams Systems with 15 A to 280 A rated armature current $UPDWXUHLQIHHG $X[LOLDU\VXSSO\ 81 9+] 9+] ([W ' 4 ' 4 * 4 ) 4 ' 4 ' 7 99 99 1 4 1 4 ' ) 1 4 &RQWUROV\VWHP &DELQHWIDQ ' ) ' 4 8 4 * 5 * 5 ' M 0 1~ =U1 AOP30 -A31 * 7 'HYLFH RSWLRQV &RQWURO RSWLRQV + ) 1) ([W ) 0 M 3~ Figure 7-1 2QO\IRU4GULYHV + 0 M Schematic circuit diagram 15 A to 280 A SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 99 Functions, monitoring and protective functions 7.3 Block diagrams Systems with 400 A to 850 A rated armature current $UPDWXUHLQIHHG $X[LOLDU\VXSSO\ 81 9+] 9+] ([W ' 4 ' 4 * 4 ) 4 ) 4 ' 4 ' 7 99 99 1 4 1 4 1 4 * 5 1 4 &RQWUROV\VWHP ' ) ' ) * 5 8 $23 $ * 7 'HYLFH RSWLRQV &RQWURO RSWLRQV + ) ([W ) 0 M 3~ Figure 7-2 2QO\IRU4GULYHV + 0 M Schematic circuit diagram 400 A to 850 A SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 100 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Functions, monitoring and protective functions 7.3 Block diagrams Systems with 950 A to 3000 A rated armature current $UPDWXUHLQIHHG $X[LOLDU\VXSSO\ 81 9+] 9+] Ext. =D3 -Q12 =D3 M -Q11 =F1 -Q11 =F1 -Q21 =G1 -Q11 =D5 -Q11 =D5 -T11 400 V/230 V 460 V/230 V =N2 -Q11 =N1 -Q12 =G1 -R12 =N2 -Q21 =D5 -F11 &RQWUROV\VWHP =D5 -F12 =G1 -R11 =U1 AOP30 -A31 =G1 -T11 Ext. =F1 -M11 M 3~ Figure 7-3 Deviceoptions Controloptions =H1 -M11 M Schematic circuit diagram 950 A to 3000 A SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 101 Functions, monitoring and protective functions 7.4 Auxiliary supply 7.4 Auxiliary supply Function of the auxiliary supply An auxiliary supply supplied by the customer is fed in to all variants without options (see Chapter External supply (Page 79)). This electric circuit is switched via a control voltage main switch with a manually operated knob through the cabinet door. The cabinet door can only be opened when the control voltage main switch is disconnected. All auxiliary and additional components, the exciter circuit and the feeders for the fan of the DC motor are supplied by the auxiliary supply (3-ph 400 V AC 50 Hz or 3-ph 460 V AC 60 Hz). The AOP30 is provided in the cabinet door for simple operation and diagnostics and a sound technical overview of the drive cabinet provides the detailed documentation including the circuit manual with the circuit diagram and terminal diagram. The auxiliary supply is used for the following purposes: Supply of the field power unit with 1-ph 400 V AC 50 Hz or 1-ph 460 V AC 60 Hz Supply of the outgoing circuit of the motor fan with 3-ph 400 V AC 50 Hz or 3-ph 460 V AC 60 Hz Supply of the unit fan of the the force-ventilated converter equipment 400 A DC rated current with 3-ph 400 V AC 50 Hz or 3-ph 460 V AC 60 Hz Generation of an internal control voltage 1-ph 230 V AC 50 Hz or 60 Hz The internal control voltage is used for the following purposes: - Feed for the electronics power supply of the converter equipment - Supply of the system-internal control voltage circuit to control the field-circuit contactor, line contactor / circuit breaker and contactor(s) for the motor fan, the contactor for the device fan and the contactor for the cabinet fan - Supply of the cabinet fan in systems from 15 A DC rated current up to 280 A DC rated current 7.5 Power unit infeed Function of the infeed of the power unit The power unit infeed for the armature circuit is 3-phase. The components in the main circuit are designed according to the rated data of the converter cabinet on the rating plate. A different rated voltage of the supply system or a design adapted to the data of the connected DC motor must be specified in the course of request or order and can be taken into account as an option or in the form of an engineering solution. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 102 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Functions, monitoring and protective functions 7.6 Armature circuit supply power circuit 7.6 Armature circuit supply power circuit Main components in the armature power circuit for systems with DC rated currents From 15 A to 850 A and From 950 A to 3.000 A Systems with DC rated currents between 15 A and 850 A See single-pole Block diagrams (Page 99) (rated armature current 15 A to 280 A and 400 A to 850 A). Switch =D3-Q11 Manually activated 3KL switch-disconnector-fuse The switch is only accessible when the cabinet door is open. The line-side semiconductor fuses to protect the power unit of the converter for the armature circuit are installed in this switch. When disconnected, both the line-side and the converter-side connections of the fuses are de-energized. The fuses allocated to the applicable cabinet type can be found in the Operating Instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, Chapter connecting/fuses or in the parts list of the individual documentation of the respective system. Line contactor =N1-Q11 The main contactor is controlled by the sequential control system integrated into the system. The main contactor is designed for AC1 operation with the system's rated current. Line choke for the armature circuit =G1-R11 The line choke is designed for continuous operation with the system's rated current. The voltage drop of the line choke is 4 % for operation with rated current, in respect of the nominal value of the supply voltage (star voltage). DC fuse =H1-F11 (in 4-quadrant system) A semiconductor fuse is installed on the DC side to protect against the effects of shootthroughs in 4-quadrant systems. The fuse allocated to the applicable cabinet type can be found in the Operating Instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, Chapter connecting/fuses or in the parts list of the individual documentation of the respective system. Systems with DC rated currents between 950 A and 3000 A See single-pole Block diagrams (Page 99) (rated armature current 950 A to 3000 A). Converters of this this type spectrum have branch fuses installed for semiconductor protection. This is why these fuses are not installed separately in the cabinet. Branch fuses provide protection on both the AC side and the DC side of the power unit. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 103 Functions, monitoring and protective functions 7.7 Field supply power circuit Switch =D3-Q11 Motor-tripped circuit breaker of the type series 3WL1 with undervoltage trip unit and ETU15B tripping unit. The tripping unit must be set in the course of commissioning in accordance with the system conditions. The detailed circuit breaker Operating Instructions are part of the complete documentation of the system. Line choke for the armature circuit =G1-R11 The line choke is designed for continuous operation with the system's rated current. The short-circuit voltage of the line choke is 4 % for operation with rated current, in respect of the nominal value of the supply voltage (star voltage). 7.7 Field supply power circuit The main components in the power circuit of the field supply are: Semiconductor fuses =G1-Q11 The fuses allocated to the applicable cabinet type can be found in the parts list of the individual documentation of the respective system. Field-circuit contactor =N1-Q12 The field-circuit contactor is controlled by the sequential control system integrated into the system. The field-circuit contactor is designed for AC1 operation the system's rated field current. Line choke for the field circuit =G1-R12 The line choke is designed for continuous operation with the system's rated current. The voltage drop of the line choke is 4 % for operation with rated current, in respect of the nominal value of the supply voltage. 7.8 Control functions for switch on, switch off and release In the basic version, the ON/OFF1 functions are controlled via input coupling relay =XK-K12 and the controller enable signal is controlled via input coupling relay =XK-K13. The required control voltage is 1-ph 230 V AC Optionally (option C51), the input coupling relays (=XK-K11 to =XK-K14) can also be designed with 24 V DC coil voltage. The relay output XR1-109 -110 of the converter equipment controls the field-circuit contactor; an auxiliary contact of the field-circuit contactor controls the main contactor or the circuit breaker. As a result of this concept, the "Switch field-circuit contactor with main contactor" function (parameter p50082=1) must be activated in the course of commissioning. The control sequence is described in detail in the Operating Instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter in Chapter Description of Functions / switch on, switch off, enable. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 104 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Functions, monitoring and protective functions 7.9 E-STOP 7.9 E-STOP The E-STOP function is provided by a black mushroom pushbutton built into the cabinet door that locks when pressed and can be unlocked by pulling. Further line-side E-STOP contacts can be integrated into the signal chain via customer terminal block X2-3 -4. The E-STOP function described in the Operating Instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter in Chapter Description of Functions / safety shutdown (E-STOP). In the standard configuration, the safety shut-down via E-STOP affects the field-circuit contactor and the main contactor or the circuit breaker in the AC branch of the armature circuit. Note The E-STOP function is not an EMERGENCY OFF function in the sense of EN 60204-1. 7.10 Control of equipment fan, cabinet fan and motor fan The fan of the converter (devices 600 A DC rated current), the fan of the converter cabinet (if available) and the outgoing circuit for the motor fan or the outgoing circuit for the optional 2nd motor fan are all controlled via a binary output from the converter. The binary output X71.19 .23 is therefore not available to the customer. The binary output controls a 24 V contactor relay. The contactor relay switches the feeder for the converter or cabinet fan. The contactor for the motor fan's feeder is switched via an auxiliary contact. Each fan is monitored and protected by a separate motor circuit breaker. The signaling contacts of the motor circuit breakers are combined in the group signal "m.c.b. trip combined alarm signal". The function "Switch on auxiliary circuits" is used for control. The function "Switch on auxiliary circuits" is described in the Operating Instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter in Chapter Description of Functions / switching on auxiliary circuits. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 105 Functions, monitoring and protective functions 7.10 Control of equipment fan, cabinet fan and motor fan SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 106 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Diagnostics / faults and alarms 8.1 8 Diagnostics The SINAMICS DCM DC Converter offers a range of diagnostics options. These are described in the Operating Instructions of SINAMICS DCM DC Converter in Chapter 10. Additional diagnostics options provided by an individual configuration with options can be found in the descriptions of the specific options. 8.2 Operating states, alarms and faults Operating states, alarms and fault messages are displayed on the AOP30 operator panel installed in the cabinet door. How to operate the AOP30 is described in detail in the Operating Instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter in Chapter "Operation". Signaling contacts from line circuit breakers and motor circuit breakers combined in the combined alarm signal "m.c.b. trip" in a notification chain. This combined alarm signal is provided as a dry contact on terminal strip -X2.1 .2. See Chapter Electrical installation / Other connections A combined alarm signal for the converter integrated into the cabinet is provided via an output coupling relay as a dry contact on terminal strip -XK-K15. See Chapter Electrical installation / Other connections. Note Detailed information on alarms and faults is provided in the following manuals: SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Operating Instructions SINAMICS DCM List Manual SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 107 Diagnostics / faults and alarms 8.2 Operating states, alarms and faults 8.2.1 General information on alarms and faults Description The errors and states detected by the individual components of the drive unit are indicated by messages. The messages are categorized into faults and alarms. Note The individual faults and alarms are described in the section titled "Faults and alarms" in the SINAMICS DCM List Manual. Here you can also find a section titled "Function diagrams" "Faults and alarms", which contains function diagrams for the fault buffer, alarm buffer, fault trigger, and fault configuration. Properties of faults and alarms Faults - Are identified by Fxxxxx - Can lead to a fault reaction - Must be acknowledged once the cause has been remedied - Status via Control Unit and LED RDY - Status via PROFIBUS status signal ZSW1.3 (fault active) - Entry in the fault buffer Alarms - Are identified by Axxxxx - Have no further effect on the drive unit - The alarms are automatically reset once the cause has been remedied. No acknowledgment is required. - Status via PROFIBUS status signal ZSW1.7 (alarm active) - Entry in the alarm buffer General properties of faults and alarms - Can be configured (e.g. change fault to alarm, fault reaction) - Triggering on selected messages possible - Initiation of messages possible via an external signal - Contains the component number for identifying the SINAMICS component involved - Contains diagnostic information on the message involved SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 108 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Diagnostics / faults and alarms 8.2 Operating states, alarms and faults Acknowledging faults The list of faults and alarms specifies how each fault is acknowledged after the cause has been remedied. 1. Acknowledgment of faults with "POWER ON" - Switch the drive unit on/off (POWER ON). 2. Acknowledgment of faults with "IMMEDIATE" - Via PROFIBUS control signal STW1.7 (reset fault memory): 0/1 edge Set STW1.0 (ON/OFF1) = "0" and "1" - Via external input signal Binector input and interconnection with digital input p2103 = "Requested signal source" p2104 = "Requested signal source" p2105 = "Requested signal source" Across all of the drive objects (DO) of a Control Unit p2102 = "Requested signal source" 3. Acknowledgment of faults with "PULSE INHIBIT" - The fault can only be acknowledged with a pulse inhibit (r0899.11 = 0). - The same options are available for acknowledging as described under acknowledgment with IMMEDIATE. Note The drive cannot resume operation until all active faults have been acknowledged. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 109 Diagnostics / faults and alarms 8.2 Operating states, alarms and faults SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 110 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Maintenance and servicing 9.1 9 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following: Maintenance and servicing procedures that have to be carried out on a regular basis to ensure the availability of the cabinets. The exchange of components during servicing Loading firmware DANGER Operation of electrical installations in accordance with EN 50110-1 This standard applies to the operation of and all work on, with or in the vicinity of electrical installations. The "five safety rules" must be observed in particular for all maintenance and repair work: 1. Disconnect the system. 2. 3. 4. 5. Protect against reconnection. Make sure that the equipment is de-energized. Ground and short-circuit. Cover or fence off adjacent components that are still live. DANGER Hazardous voltage is still present in SINAMICS DC MASTER DC Converter snubber capacitors in the cabinet after disconnecting. The cabinet may therefore only be handled following a 2 min wait time after it has been disconnected. DANGER Even when the main switch is disconnected, there may be dangerous voltage in the cabinet. System circuit diagrams and the descriptions of the options must be observed. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 111 Maintenance and servicing 9.2 Maintenance Put the cabinet into a safe state The cabinet must be put into a safe state before all the maintenance and servicing procedures described in the following chapters: 1. Shut down the drive in an orderly manner, e.g. OFF2 command; see SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Operating Instructions. 2. Check and ensure that the motor has come to a standstill 3. Disconnect the system and other carry out other actions in accordance with the "five safety rules" as per EN 50110-1 4. Wait for all of the fans to come to a standstill 9.2 Maintenance The electrical installation mainly comprises electronic components. Apart from the fan(s), the unit contains very few components that are subject to wear or require maintenance or servicing. Maintenance is intended to ensure that the electrical installation remains in the specified condition. Dirt and contamination must be removed regularly and parts subject to wear replaced. The following points must generally be observed. 9.2.1 Cleaning Dust deposits Dust deposits inside the cabinets must be removed at regular intervals (or at least once a year) by qualified personnel in line with the relevant safety regulations. The unit must be cleaned using a brush and vacuum cleaner, and dry compressed air (max. 1 bar) for areas that cannot be easily reached. Ventilation The ventilation openings in the cabinets must never be obstructed. The fan must be checked to make sure that it is functioning correctly. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 112 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Maintenance and servicing 9.3 Maintenance Cable and screw terminals Cable and screw terminals must be checked regularly to ensure that they are secure in position, and if necessary, retightened. Cabling must be checked for defects. Defective parts must be replaced immediately. Note The actual intervals at which maintenance procedures are to be performed depend on the installation conditions (cabinet environment) and the operating conditions. Siemens offers its customers support in the form of a service contract. For further details, contact your regional office or sales office. 9.3 Maintenance Servicing involves activities and procedures for maintaining and restoring the specified condition of the device. Required tools The following tools are required for replacing components: Wrench or socket wrench, width across the flats 10, 13, 16/17 and 18/19 Hexagon-socket wrench (size 8) Torque wrench, 5 Nm to 50 Nm Screwdriver size 1 / 2 Torx T20 and T30 screwdrivers Tightening torques for current-carrying parts When securing connections for current-carrying parts (motor connections, busbars), you must observe the following tightening torques. Table 9- 1 Tightening torques for connecting current-carrying parts Screw Torque M6 6 Nm M8 13 Nm M10 25 Nm M12 50 Nm SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 113 Maintenance and servicing 9.4 Replacing components 9.4 Replacing components WARNING The following must be taken into account when the devices are transported: The devices are heavy or generally top heavy. The center of gravity is marked on the devices. Due to their weight, the devices must be handled with care by trained personnel. Serious injury or even death and substantial material damage can occur if the devices are not lifted or transported properly. WARNING The devices are operated with high voltages. All connection work must be carried out when the cabinet is de-energized. All work on the device must be carried out by trained personnel only. Non-observance of these warning notices can result in death, severe personal injury, or substantial property damage. Even when the main switch is disconnected, there may be dangerous voltage in the cabinet. System circuit diagrams and the descriptions of the options must be observed. Hazardous voltage is still present in SINAMICS DC MASTER DC Converter snubber capacitors in the cabinet after disconnecting. The cabinet may therefore only be handled following a 2 min wait time after it has been disconnected. DANGER Operation of electrical installations in accordance with EN 50110-1 This standard applies to the operation of and all work on, with or in the vicinity of electrical installations. The "five safety rules" must be observed in particular for all maintenance and repair work: 1. Disconnect the system. 2. Protect against reconnection. 3. Make sure that the equipment is de-energized. 4. Ground and short-circuit. 5. Cover or fence off adjacent components that are still live. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 114 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Maintenance and servicing 9.4 Replacing components 9.4.1 Replacing the filter mats Replacing the filter mats (for IP23/IP43/IP54) The filter mats must be checked at regular intervals. If the mats are too dirty to allow the air supply to flow normally, they must be replaced. Note If you do not replace dirty filter mats, this can cause a premature thermal shutdown of the drive. Ordering data are available in the spare parts lists. Preparatory steps DANGER You must read and comply with the safety instructions provided in this manual. Put the cabinet into a safe state Allow unimpeded access to the grill area of the doors. Removing/installing filter mats from/in the cabinet doors (IP23/IP43/IP54) Figure 9-1 Removing/installing filter mats (IP23/IP43/IP54) 1. Insert the screwdriver into the cut-out sections provided (1) and gently push the grill cover (2) down and forwards, then remove it. 2. Remove the filter mat (3). 3. Clean the ventilation grill (5). 4. Insert the new filter mat. 5. Replace the grill cover and gently snap it back into position in the cut-out sections. 6. Repeat the procedure for all filter mats that need to be replaced. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 115 Maintenance and servicing 9.4 Replacing components CAUTION Make sure that no dirt falls into the cabinet. The filter mat (degree of protection IP54) must be placed in the correct position (arrow points towards the cabinet). The filter mat must be mounted on the upper guide edge (4). If you do not do this, the specified degree of protection IP23/IP43/IP54 will not be achieved. When disposing of old filter mats, observe the applicable legal requirements. 9.4.2 Replacing the cabinet fan By default, the cabinets of frame size BC are equipped with mounted cabinet fans. The service life of the device fans is typically 50000 h. In practice, however, the service life depends on other variables (e.g., ambient temperature, degree of cabinet protection, etc.) and, therefore, may deviate from this value. The fans must be replaced in good time to ensure the availability of the SINAMICS DC MASTER Cabinet. Preparatory steps Put the cabinet into a safe state Allow unimpeded access. Procedure 1. Disconnect/unplug fan supply 2. Dismantle the top panel with the fan (4 screws on top of the cabinet) 3. Remove the fan's retaining screws on the inside of the top panel 4. Replace fans 5. Reinstall the top panel. Tightening torque: 15 Nm 6. Connect/plug in the fan supply again SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 116 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Maintenance and servicing 9.4 Replacing components 9.4.3 Replacing fuses Type designations and order numbers for the fuses can be found in the spare parts list. CAUTION Only the specified types may be used. WARNING Make sure that the cause of the fault is found before the fuse is replaced. Preparatory steps Put the cabinet into a safe state Allow unimpeded access. Cartridge fuses Figure 9-2 Replacing a cartridge fuse SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 117 Maintenance and servicing 9.4 Replacing components LV HRC fuses Fuses in the main switch Fuse in the motor circuit Fuse in the auxiliary voltage switch (option) Figure 9-3 Replacing LV HRC fuses SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 118 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Maintenance and servicing 9.4 Replacing components 9.4.4 Replacing the door-mounted operator panel Figure 9-4 Replacing the AOP30 1. Put the cabinet into a safe state 2. Open the cabinet. 3. Disconnect the power supply and communications line on the operator panel. 4. Release the fastenings on the operator panel. 5. Remove the operator panel and install the new operator panel. 9.4.5 Replacing the back-up battery in the AOP30 operator panel Table 9- 2 Technical specifications of the backup battery Type CR2032 3 V lithium battery Manufacturer Maxell, Sony, Panasonic Nominal charge 220 mAh Self-discharge at 20 C 1 %/year Service life (in backup mode) > 1 year at 70 C; >1.5 years at 20 C Service life (during operation) > 2 years SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 119 Maintenance and servicing 9.4 Replacing components Replacement 1. Put the cabinet into a safe state 2. Open the cabinet. 3. Disconnect the 24 V DC power supply and communications line on the operator panel. 4. Open the cover of the battery compartment. 5. Remove the old battery and insert the new battery. 6. Close the cover of the battery compartment. 7. Reconnect the 24 V DC power supply and communications line. 8. Close the cabinet. NOTICE The battery must be replaced within one minute to ensure that no AOP settings are lost. Figure 9-5 Replacing the backup battery for the cabinet operator panel Note The battery must be disposed of in accordance with the manufacturer guidelines and applicable country-specific laws and directives. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 120 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Maintenance and servicing 9.5 Maintenance and replacing the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter 9.5 Maintenance and replacing the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Maintenance The maintenance work required on the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter is described in the Operating Instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, Chapter 11. Software update The software update on the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter is described in the Operating Instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, Chapter 11. Replacement Please contact our Technical Support to replace the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter. For contact details, see Preface. WARNING Replacement SINAMICS DCM DC Converter devices must be equipped with option L99. Devices without this option do not support all cabinet functions; the function of the device is not guaranteed and safety is not guaranteed. Exchange the adapter board for the connection to the Terminal Module Cabinet (TMC) Figure 9-6 Exchanging the TMC adapter SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 121 Maintenance and servicing 9.6 Load the cabinet-specific parameter settings to parameter data set 20 In the SINAMICS DC Converter the adapter board is snapped onto the CUD at the four attachment elements - and can be released by pressing together the end piece that is able to spring. Replacement SINAMICS DC converter units are supplied without this adapter board. When replacing the SINAMICS DCM DC converter, at this position the integrated terminal module must be removed and installed at the same position on the existing TMC adapter. NOTICE For SINAMICS DCM DC converters equipped with a second CUD, when replacing a unit, the two TMC adapters must be installed at the same position as in the original state. 9.6 Load the cabinet-specific parameter settings to parameter data set 20 The SINAMICS DCM DC converter used in the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet is parameterized before the system is shipped, so that all of the ordered cabinet options are already completely functional. The settings are saved in parameter data set 20. Descriptions of the parameter data sets and volatile or non-volatile memories can be found in the operating instructions SINAMICS DCM DC Converter (for example in the Chapter, Functions of the memory card). Procedure to reset the parameters to the settings saved in parameter data set 20: Switch-on the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter electronics power supply and wait until the device has powered up Set p0009=30 (parameter reset) Set p0976=20 (start to load the internal Siemens setting 20). Parameter data set 20 is loaded into the volatile memory (RAM) Set p0977=1. The settings are saved in the non-volatile memory (ROM). Notes: For the setting p0976 =20, the parameter settings previously effective in the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter are lost. By resetting the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter to the factory setting with p0976 =1, all parameters are reset to their factory settings according to the List Manual. This means that the factory activated cabinet options that were ordered are lost. Parameter data set 20 cannot be overwritten (e.g. using p0977 = 20). SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 122 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Maintenance and servicing 9.7 Messages after replacement of DRIVE-CLiQ components 9.7 Messages after replacement of DRIVE-CLiQ components After DRIVE-CLiQ components are replaced (TM15, TM31, SMC30) by spare parts, no message is generally output after switching on, as an identical component is identified and accepted as a replacement part when the system boots. If, however, a fault message of the "topology fault" category is displayed, contrary to expectations, one of the following faults may have occurred when replacing a component: The connections have been swapped when connecting the DRIVE-CLiQ cables. The level for the topology comparison has been set too high. Automatic firmware update A firmware update for the replaced DRIVE-CLiQ component may run automatically after switching on the electronics. The following LEDs will flash slowly to indicate that an automatic firmware update is in progress: the "RDY" LED on the control unit (orange, 0.5 Hz) and an LED on the relevant DRIVE-CLiQ component (green/red, 0.5 Hz). CAUTION The SINAMICS DCM Cabinet must not be shut down during this process. Once the automatic firmware update is complete, the "RDY" LED on the control unit will flash quickly (orange, 2 Hz), as will an LED on the relevant DRIVE-CLiQ component (green/red, 2 Hz). To complete the automatic firmware update process, a POWER ON is required (switch the device off and back on again). SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 123 Maintenance and servicing 9.8 Loading new operator panel firmware from the PC 9.8 Loading new operator panel firmware from the PC Firmware might need to be loaded to the AOP if the AOP functionality needs to be upgraded. If, once the drive has powered up, the memory card is found to contain a newer version of the firmware, a message will appear on the AOP30 prompting you to load the new firmware. You should click "YES" in response to this prompt. The firmware will then be loaded automatically on the operator panel and the following dialog screen will appear. 6,(0(166,1$0,&6 6RIWZDUHEHLQJORDGHG 3OHDVHGRQRWGLVFRQQHFWWKHSRZHU VXSSO\ ) Figure 9-7 ) ) ) ) Dialog screen: loading firmware If the firmware cannot be loaded successfully, it can be loaded using the following manual method. The load program LOAD_AOP30 and the firmware file can be found on the customer DVD. Loading the firmware 1. Establish the RS232 connection from the PC to the AOP30. 2. Provide the supply voltage (24 V DC). 3. Start the LOAD_AOP30 program on the PC. 4. Choose the PC interface (COM1, COM2). 5. Choose and open the firmware (AOP30.H86). 6. Follow the instructions in the status window of the program and connect the power supply for the AOP30 while pressing the red key (O). 7. The load procedure is started automatically. 8. Switch the power on (switch the power supply off and then back on). SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 124 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.1 10 Chapter content This chapter provides information on the following: General and specific technical specifications for the devices. Information on constraints that apply when the devices are used in unfavorable ambient conditions (derating). 10.2 Table 10- 1 General data General technical specifications General technical specifications Electrical data Closed-loop control constancy n=0.006 % of rated speed for pulse encoder operation and digital setpoint. n=0.1% of rated speed for analog tachometer and/or analog setpoint. The closed-loop control (closed-loop PI control) constancy is related to the rated motor speed and applies when the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter is at the operating temperature. This is subject to the following preconditions: Overload capability Temperature changes of 10 K Line supply voltage changes of +10 % / -5 % of the rated input voltage Temperature coefficient of tachometer generator with temperature compensation: 0.15 every 10 K (with analog tachometer generator only) Constant setpoint (14-bit resolution) Max. 1.8x rated DC current For dynamic overload capability, see Operating Instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, Chapter 10 Degree of protection in accordance with EN 60 529/IEC 60 529 Degree of protection against installation room Standard: IP20 Options: IP21, IP23, IP43, IP54 Ambient conditions Ambient temperature during operation at rated DC current 15 A to 125 A: 0 to +40 210 A to 3000 A: 0 to +35 Higher temperatures with derating (see Chapter Derating (Page 131)) Ambient temperature Transport: -25 C to +60 C; storage: -25 C to 55 C Degree of pollution 2 according to EN 61800-5-1 Installation altitude Up to 1000 m above sea level without derating, > 1000 m above sea level with derating (see Chapter Derating (Page 131)) Environmental class 3K3 according to DIN IEC 60721-3-3 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 125 Technical specifications 10.2 General data General technical specifications Surface Covering Dip-primed and powder-coated, RAL 7032 structure Rack Dip-primed, RAL 7032 Mounting plate Zinc-plated Mechanical strength Storage Transport Operation 1.5 mm at 2 to 9 Hz 5 m/s at > 9 to 200 Hz 1M2 according to EN 60721-3-1 1.5 mm at 2 to 9 Hz 5 m/s at > 9 to 200 Hz 1.5 mm at 2 to 9 Hz 5 m/s at > 9 to 200 Hz 3M2 according to EN 607213-3 40 m/s at 11 ms 1M2 according to EN 60721-3-1 40 m/s at 11 ms 40 m/s at 11 ms 3M2 according to EN 607213-3 Vibratory load: - Displacement - Acceleration corresponds to class Shock load - Acceleration corresponds to class Deviations from the defined classes are shown in italics. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 126 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.2 General data 10.2.1 Load types The system can be dimensioned on the basis of the load cycle so that it is adapted as efficiently as possible to the load profile of the driven machine. The SINAMICS DCM DC Converter is set using parameter p50067. Table 10- 2 Load classes Load class Load for converter Load cycle DC I (p50067 = 1) IDC I continuous (IdN) ,'&, W DC II (p50067 = 2) IDC II for 15 mins and 1.5 x IDC II for 60 s ,'&,, PLQ W DC III (p50067 = 3) IDC III for 15 mins and 1.5 x IDC III for 120 s , '&,,, PLQ W DC IV (p50067 = 4) IDC IV for 15 mins and 2 x IDC IV for 10 s PLQ ,'&,9 US rating (p50067 = 5) IUS for 15 mins and 1.5 x IUS for 60 s ,86 W PLQ W NOTICE If a value > 1 is set at p50067, you need to make sure that the "Dynamic overload capability of the power unit" is enabled. This requires a value > 0 to be set at p50075. The SINAMICS DCM DC Converter does not monitor whether the load class set using p50067 is being adhered to. If the power unit permits it, longer overload periods can be used than correspond to the load class. The actual permissible overload duration for the particular power unit is always greater than the overload duration corresponding to the particular load class. The SINAMICS DCM DC Converter does monitor whether the overload duration that is actually permitted for the power unit is being adhered to. For details on the dynamic overload capability of the power unit, see the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Operating Instructions, Chapter 10. The 100 % IDCx shown above DO NOT generally correspond to the rated current of the units, but are derated as per the following table. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 127 Technical specifications 10.2 General data Duty cycles for 2Q applications Table 10- 3 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 6RM80.. Duty cycles Duty cycles Ta DC I continuous C DC II DC III DC IV US rating Tu = 40 C 15 min 100 % 60 s 150% 15 min 100 % 120 s 150% 15 min 100 % 10 s 200 % 15 min 100 % 60 s 150% A A A A A A A A A 400 V, 2Q .25-6DS22 40 60 51.4 77.1 50.2 75.3 46.4 92.8 51.4 77.1 .28-6DS22 40 90 74.4 111 72.8 109 65.4 130 74.4 111 .31-6DS22 40 125 106 159 103 155 96.3 192 106 159 .75-6DS22 35 210 164 247 161 242 136 273 157 236 .78-6DS22 35 280 226 340 219 328 201 402 215 323 .81-6DS22 35 400 290 435 282 423 244 488 278 417 .85-6DS22 35 600 462 693 446 669 413 826 443 665 .87-6DS22 35 850 652 978 622 933 609 1219 619 929 .91-6DS22 35 1200 884 1326 857 1286 768 1537 842 1263 .93-4DS22 35 1600 1255 1883 1213 1819 1139 2279 1190 1785 .95-4DS22 35 2000 1477 2216 1435 2152 1326 2653 1404 2106 .98-4DS22 35 3000 2288 3432 2189 3283 2164 4328 2178 3267 480 V, 2Q .25-6FS22 40 60 51.4 77.1 50.2 75.3 46.4 92.8 51.4 77.1 .28-6FS22 40 90 74.4 111 72.8 109 65.4 130 74.4 111 .31-6FS22 40 125 106 159 103 155 96.3 192 106 159 .75-6FS22 35 210 164 247 161 242 136 273 157 236 .78-6FS22 35 280 226 340 219 328 201 402 215 323 .82-6FS22 35 450 320 480 311 466 274 548 306 460 .85-6FS22 35 600 462 693 446 669 413 826 443 665 .87-6FS22 35 850 652 978 622 933 609 1219 619 929 .91-6FS22 35 1200 884 1326 857 1286 768 1537 842 1263 575 V, 2Q .25-6GS22 40 60 51.4 77.1 50.2 75.3 46.4 92.8 51.4 77.1 .31-6GS22 40 125 106 159 103 155 96.3 192 106 159 .75-6GS22 35 210 164 247 161 242 136 273 157 236 .81-6GS22 35 400 290 435 282 423 244 488 278 417 .85-6GS22 35 600 462 693 446 669 413 826 443 665 .87-6GS22 35 800 607 911 581 872 559 1118 578 867 .90-6GS22 35 1100 804 1207 782 1173 689 1379 766 1150 .93-4GS22 35 1600 1255 1883 1213 1819 1139 2279 1190 1785 .95-4GS22 35 2000 1663 2494 1591 2386 1568 3136 1569 2354 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 128 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.2 General data .96-4GS22 35 2200 1779 2669 1699 2549 1697 3394 1678 2517 .97-4GS22 35 2800 2136 3204 2044 3066 2022 4044 2024 3036 .86-6KS22 35 720 553 829 527 791 515 1031 525 788 .90-6KS22 35 1000 737 1105 715 1072 639 1279 702 1053 .93-4KS22 35 1500 1171 1757 1140 1710 1036 2073 1116 1674 .95-4KS22 35 2000 1589 2383 1522 2283 1505 3011 1503 2255 .97-4KS22 35 2600 1992 2989 1906 2859 1887 3774 1876 2815 690 V, 2Q 830 V, 2Q .88-6LS22 35 950 700 1051 679 1019 607 1215 667 1001 .93-4LS22 35 1500 1171 1757 1140 1710 1036 2073 1116 1674 .95-4LS22 35 1900 1485 2228 1421 2132 1396 2793 1414 2121 35 2200 1674 2511 1603 2404 1570 3141 1588 2382 950 V, 2Q .96-4MS22 Duty cycles for 4Q applications Table 10- 4 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 6RM80.. Duty cycles Duty cycles Ta DC I continuous C DC II DC III DC IV US rating Tu = 40 C 15 min 100 % 60 s 150% 15 min 100 % 120 s 150% 15 min 100 % 10 s 200 % 15 min 100 % 60 s 150% A A A A A A A A A 400 V, 4Q .13-6DV62 40 15 13.9 20.8 13.5 20.2 12.6 25.2 13.9 20.8 .18-6DV62 40 30 24.9 37.3 24.2 36.3 22.4 44.8 24.9 37.3 .25-6DV62 40 60 53.1 79.6 51.8 77.7 47.2 94.4 53.1 79.6 .28-6DV62 40 90 78.2 117 76.0 114 72.2 144 78.2 117 .31-6DV62 40 125 106 159 103 155 95.4 190 106 159 .75-6DV62 35 210 164 247 161 242 136 273 157 236 .78-6DV62 35 280 226 340 219 328 201 402 215 323 .81-6DV62 35 400 300 450 292 438 247 494 285 428 .85-6DV62 35 600 470 706 453 680. 410 820 450 675 .87-6DV62 35 850 658 987 634 951 579 1159 626 939 .91-6DV62 35 1200 884 1326 857 1286 768 1537 842 1263 .93-4DV62 35 1600 1255 1883 1213 1819 1139 2279 1190 1785 .95-4DV62 35 2000 1477 2216 1435 2152 1326 2653 1404 2106 .98-4DV62 35 3000 2288 3432 2189 3283 2164 4328 2178 3267 .13-6FV62 40 15 13.9 20.8 13.5 20.2 12.6 25.2 13.9 20.8 .18-6FV62 40 30 24.9 37.3 24.2 36.3 22.4 44.8 24.9 37.3 480 V, 4Q SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 129 Technical specifications 10.2 General data .25-6FV62 40 60 53.1 79.6 51.8 77.7 47.2 94.4 53.1 79.6 .28-6FV62 40 90 78.2 117 76 114 72.2 144 78.2 117 .31-6FV62 40 125 106 159 103 155 95.4 190 106 159 .75-6FV62 35 210 164 247 161 242 136 273 157 236 .78-6FV62 35 280 226 340 219 328 201 402 215 323 .82-6FV62 35 450 320 480 311 466 274 548 306 460 .85-6FV62 35 600 470 706 453 680 410 820 450 675 .87-6FV62 35 850 658 987 634 951 579 1159 626 939 .91-6FV62 35 1200 884 1326 857 1286 768 1537 842 1263 .25-6GV62 40 60 53.1 79.6 51.8 77.7 47.2 94.4 53.1 79.6 .31-6GV62 40 125 106 159 103 155 95.4 190 106 159 .75-6GV62 35 210 164 247 161 242 136 273 157 236 .81-6GV62 35 400 300 450 292 438 247 494 285 428 .85-6GV62 35 600 470 706 453 680 410 820 450 675 .87-6GV62 35 850 658 987 634 951 579 1159 626 939 .90-6GV62 35 1100 804 1207 782 1173 689 1379 766 1150 .93-4GV62 35 1600 1255 1883 1213 1819 1139 2279 1190 1785 .95-4GV62 35 2000 1663 2494 1591 2386 1568 3136 1569 2354 .96-4GV62 35 2200 1779 2669 1699 2549 1697 3394 1678 2517 .97-4GV62 35 2800 2136 3204 2044 3066 2022 4044 2024 3036 .86-6KV62 35 760 598 898 575 863 532 1065 569 853 .90-6KV62 35 1000 737 1105 715 1072 639 1279 702 1053 .93-4KV62 35 1500 1171 1757 1140 1710 1036 2073 1116 1674 .95-4KV62 35 2000 1589 2383 1522 2283 1505 3011 1503 2255 .97-4KV62 35 2600 1992 2989 1906 2859 1887 3774 1876 2815 575 V, 4Q 690 V, 4Q 830 V, 4Q .88-6LV62 35 950 700 1051 679 1019 607 1215 667 1001 .93-4LV62 35 1500 1171 1757 1140 1710 1036 2073 1116 1674 .95-4LV62 35 1900 1485 2228 1421 2132 1396 2793 1414 2121 35 2200 1674 2511 1603 2404 1570 3141 1588 2382 950 V, 4Q .96-4MV62 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 130 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.2 General data 10.2.2 Derating Depending on the ambient temperature and the installation altitude, derating is required for the maximum permissible load of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet. The derating factor can be found in the following tables and must be set on the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter using p50077. Intermediate values can be obtained through linear interpolation. Table 10- 5 Derating factor for systems with rated armature DC current 125 A Degree of protection Installation altitude above sea level Ambient or coolant temperature 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C IP20 1000 m 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.94 0.88 IP21 2000 m 1.00 1.00 0.94 0.88 0.82 x 3000 m 0.96 0.90 0.84 x x x 4000 m 0.86 0.80 x x x x 5000 m 0.78 x x x x x IP23 1000 m 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.94 0.88 IP43 2000 m 1.00 1.00 0.94 0.88 0.82 x IP54 3000 m 0.96 0.90 0.84 x x x 4000 m 0.86 0.80 x x x x 5000 m 0.78 x x x x x x ... SINAMICS DCM Cabinet operation not possible Table 10- 6 Derating factor for systems with rated armature DC current 210 A to <720 A Degree of protection Installation altitude above sea level Ambient or coolant temperature 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C IP20 1000 m 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.95 0.90 x IP21 2000 m 0.96 0.91 0.86 0.81 0.76 x 3000 m 0.86 0.81 0.76 x x x 4000 m 0.76 0.71 x x x x 5000 m 0.68 x x x x x IP23 1000 m 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.95 0.90 x IP43 2000 m 0.98 0.93 0.88 0.83 0.78 x IP54 3000 m 0.88 0.83 0.78 x x x 4000 m 0.78 0.73 x x x x 5000 m 0.70 x x x x x x ... SINAMICS DCM Cabinet operation not possible SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 131 Technical specifications 10.2 General data Table 10- 7 Derating factor for systems with rated armature DC current 720 A to <950 A Degree of protection Installation altitude above sea level Ambient or coolant temperature 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C IP20 1000 m 1.00 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85 x IP21 2000 m 0.93 0.88 0.83 0.78 0.73 x 3000 m 0.83 0.78 0.73 x x x 4000 m 0.73 0.68 x x x x 5000 m 0.65 x x x x x IP23 1000 m 1.00 1.00 0.98 0.93 0.88 x IP43 2000 m 0.96 0.91 0.86 0.81 0.76 x IP54 3000 m 0.86 0.81 0.76 x x x 4000 m 0.76 0.71 x x x x 5000 m 0.68 x x x x x x ... SINAMICS DCM Cabinet operation not possible Table 10- 8 Derating factor for systems with rated armature DC current 950 A to <1500 A Degree of protection Installation altitude above sea level Ambient or coolant temperature 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C IP20 1000 m 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.94 0.89 x IP21 2000 m 0.97 0.92 0.87 0.82 0.77 x 3000 m 0.87 0.82 0.77 x x x 4000 m 0.77 0.72 x x x x 5000 m 0.69 x x x x x IP23 1000 m 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.95 0.90 x IP43 2000 m 0.98 0.93 0.88 0.83 0.78 x IP54 3000 m 0.88 0.83 0.78 x x x 4000 m 0.78 0.73 x x x x 5000 m 0.70 x x x x x x ... SINAMICS DCM Cabinet operation not possible SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 132 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.2 General data Table 10- 9 Derating factor for systems with armature rated DC current of 1500 A Degree of protection Installation altitude above sea level Ambient or coolant temperature 25 C 30 C 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C IP20 1000 m 1.00 1.00 0.95 0.90 0.85 x IP21 2000 m 0.93 0.88 0.83 0.78 0.73 x 3000 m 0.83 0.78 0.73 x x x 4000 m 0.73 0.68 x x x x 5000 m 0.65 x x x x x IP23 1000 m 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.95 0.90 x IP43 2000 m 0.98 0.93 0.88 0.83 0.78 x IP54 3000 m 0.88 0.83 0.78 x x x 4000 m 0.78 0.73 x x x x 5000 m 0.70 x x x x x x ... SINAMICS DCM Cabinet operation not possible Voltage derating as a function of the installation altitude (to ensure "protective separation"): The SINAMICS DCM Cabinet series meets overvoltage category III according to EN 618005-1 for line supply circuits with respect to the environment (other line supply circuits, enclosures, electronics). For electronics and field supplies with voltages of max. 2-ph 400 V AC (line-to-line; maximum 230 V AC to ground), operation is permitted up to 5000 m above sea level. For electronics and field supplies with voltages of 2-ph. 480 V AC (line-to-line; maximum 300 V AC to ground), operation is permitted up to 4500 m above sea level. All units, with 400 V up to 575 V as well as also with 690 V to 950 V rated armature supply voltage, can be operated up to a maximum of 4000 m above sea level without voltage derating. For units with rated armature supply voltages of 690 V to 950 V, up to 4500 m a maximum 930 V AC and up to 5000 m, a maximum 880 V AC is permissible as armature supply voltage. For units with rated armature supply voltages of 400 V to 575 V, up to 4500 m a maximum 550 V AC and up to 5000 m, a maximum 500 V AC is permissible as armature supply voltage. According to EN61800-5-1, operation of units without "safe electrical separation" is only permissible if it can be absolutely excluded that persons are in danger by being able to directly touch or indirectly touch parts, i.e. in operation, none of the CUD interfaces can be touched. Data interfaces can be connected by optical isolation. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 133 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications CAUTION When the conditions differ from the above stated (cable routing, cable grouping, ambient temperature), the following instructions for routing the cables must be taken into account: The required cable cross-section depends on the amperage which flows through the cable. The permissible current loading of cables is defined, for example, in DIN VDE 0276-1000 and IEC 60364-5-52. It depends partly on ambient conditions such as temperature and partly on the type of routing. If the cables are routed individually, they will be cooled relatively well. If several cables are routed together, they may heat each other up. Please note the corresponding derating factors for these supplementary conditions in DIN VDE 0276-1000 and IEC 60364-5-52. Note With option L00 (radio interference suppression filter), the short-circuit current strength may differ from the data provided in the following tables. See Chapter L00, radio interference suppression filter (Page 219). Note For the specified line-side fusing, a higher line short-circuit current is permissible depending on the fuse used. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 134 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 400 V AC, 2Q 6RM8025-6DS22 6RM8078-6DS22 6RM8091-6DS22 6RM8093-4DS22 6RM8028-6DS22 6RM8081-6DS22 6RM8031-6DS22 6RM8085-6DS22 6RM8095-4DS22 6RM8098-4DS22 6RM8075-6DS22 6RM8087-6DS22 Table 10- 10 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 400 V AC, 60 A to 210 A, 2Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..25-6DS22 ..28-6DS22 ..31-6DS22 ..75-6DS22 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) V 3-ph 400 V AC (+15 % / -20 %) Rated frequency 4) Hz 50 Armature rated input current 2) A 49.8 74.7 104 174 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 50 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 463 592 691 1152 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 63 80 125 200 Rated DC voltage 1) V 485 Rated DC current A 60 90 125 210 kW 29.1 43.7 60.6 102 Rated DC voltage 1) V 325 325 325 325 Rated DC current A 10 10 10 15 Armature circuit DC connection Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 400 V AC (+15% / -20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 30 30 30 16 16 16 25 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 0.35 to 0.5 0.9 to 1.25 0.9 to 1.25 0.9 to 1.25 Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Fan air flow m3/h 800 800 800 800 Fan noise level dBA 71 71 71 71 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 135 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..25-6DS22 ..28-6DS22 ..31-6DS22 ..75-6DS22 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg BC BC BC BC 233 233 240 263 Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section. For tightening torques, see the tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature without filter Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 63 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 125 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 125 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 250 A with fuses Terminal end 1x16 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x25 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x50 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x95 mm, M10 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Terminal strip -X0; modular terminal block AC armature with filter ST35, ST35-PE UK35, USLKG35 UKH50, USLKG50 UKH150, 16 mm 25 mm 50 mm 95 mm 1x25 mm, M8 1x50 mm, M8 1x95 mm, M8 1.5 mm 1.5 mm 2.5 mm 2.5 mm 2.5 mm 4 mm 1C1, 1D1 UKH150-GNYE SINAMICS DCM DC Converter DC armature 1x16 mm, M8 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3; Field DC ST4, ST4-PE 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 1.5 mm ST4, ST4-PE 2.5 mm ST6, ST6-PE 3-ph AC armature without filter 63 A auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x4 mm, M6 Protective conductor PE 1x16 mm, M8 1x16 mm, M8 1x25 mm, M8 1x50 mm, M8 Table 10- 11 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 400 V AC, 280 A to 850 A, 2Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..78-6DS22 ..81-6DS22 ..85-6DS22 ..87-6DS22 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) V 3-ph 400 V AC (+15 % / -20 %) Rated frequency 4) Hz 50 Armature rated input current 2) A 232 332 498 706 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 50 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 1482 2131 2884 3759 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 250 355 500 710 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 136 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..78-6DS22 ..81-6DS22 ..85-6DS22 ..87-6DS22 Armature circuit DC connection Rated DC voltage 1) Rated DC current V 485 A 280 400 600 850 kW 136 194 291 412 Rated DC voltage 1) V 325 325 325 325 Rated DC current A 15 25 25 30 Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 400 V AC (+15% / -20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 30 30 30 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A 25 50 50 63 Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 0.9 to 1.25 2.8 to 4 7 to 10 7 to 10 Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Cabinet fan Device fan Device fan Device fan Fan air flow m3/h 800 800 800 800 Fan noise level dBA 71 73.8 73.8 64.5 BC CC CC DC 273 320 340 490 Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 630 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 800 A with fuses Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature without filter Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 400 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 400 A with fuses Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end 1x120 mm, M10 1x185 mm, M10 2x150 mm, M12 2x240 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature with filter Terminal strip X0 On the Filter Customer connections Customer connections UKH150, UKH150-GNYE Modular terminal block 120 mm 1x185 mm, M10 2x150 mm, M12 2x240 mm, M12 1C1, 1D1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter DC armature 2x50 mm, M8 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 Field DC ST4, ST4-PE ST6, ST6-PE 2.5 mm 4 mm 1x185 mm, M10 2x150 mm, M10 4x95 mm, M12 4 mm 4 mm SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 137 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..78-6DS22 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter ..81-6DS22 ..85-6DS22 ..87-6DS22 Terminal strip -X1 ST6, ST6-PE ST16, ST16-PE 4 mm 10 mm ST35, ST35-PE 10 mm 16 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter 63 A auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker 1x4 mm, M6 1x10 mm, M6 1x10 mm, M6 Protective conductor PE 1x70 mm, M8 1x95 mm, M10 1x150 mm, M10 2x120 mm, M12 1x16 mm, M6 Table 10- 12 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph. 400 V AC, 1,200 A, 2Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..91-6DS22 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) V 3-ph 400 V AC (+15 % / -20 %) Rated frequency 4) Hz 50 Armature rated input current 2) A 995 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 65 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 4697 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 5) Rated DC voltage 1) V 485 Rated DC current A 1200 kW 582 Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 Rated DC current A 30 Armature circuit DC connection Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / 20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A 63 Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 11 to 16 Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Device fan SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 138 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..91-6DS22 Fan air flow m3/h 1000 Fan noise level dBA 66 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) DC kg 570 Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature without filter Terminal end 4x150 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature with filter 4x150 mm, M12 1C1, 1D1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter DC armature 4x185 mm, M12 3C, 3D Terminal strip X3 Field DC ST6, ST6-PE 4 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip X1 ST35, ST35-PE 16 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter Terminal strip X1 ST35, ST35-PE 16 mm Protective conductor PE 3x150 mm, M12 6) Table 10- 13 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph. 400 V AC, 1,600 A to 3,000 A, 2Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..93-4DS22 ..95-4DS22 ..98-4DS22 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) V 3-ph 400 V AC (+15 % / -20 %) 3-ph 400 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Rated frequency 4) Hz 50 Armature rated input current 2) A 1328 1660 2490 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 75 75 75 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 6430 7618 11747 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 139 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) ..93-4DS22 ..95-4DS22 ..98-4DS22 A 5) 5) 5) V 485 A 1600 2000 3000 kW 776 970 1455 Armature circuit DC connection Rated DC voltage 1) Rated DC current Rated power Field circuit Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 390 Rated DC current A 40 40 40 Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / 20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A 100 100 100 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer with option L85 A 125 125 125 Auxiliaries power connection Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 2 x (11 to 16) 2 x (11 to 16) 2 x (11 to 16) Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Device fan Device fan Fan air flow m3/h 2400 Device fan 2400 2400 Fan noise level dBA 77.0 77.0 77.0 EC EC EC 760 800 930 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature without filter Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end 6x150 mm, M12 6x185 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature with filter 6x150 mm, M12 6x185 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 1C1, 1D1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter DC armature 7) 8x95 mm, M12 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 DC field without/with option L85 ST10, ST10-PE / UK35, USLKG35 8x150 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 6 mm2/25 mm SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 140 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..93-4DS22 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 ..95-4DS22 ..98-4DS22 without/with option L85 UKH50, USLKG50 / UKH50, USLKG50 35 mm/50 mm2 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter Terminal strip -X1 without/with option L85 UKH50, USLKG50 / UKH50, USLKG50 35 mm/50 mm2 Protective conductor PE 3x240 mm, M12 3x240 mm, M12 4x240 mm, M12 6) 6) 6) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 480 V AC, 2Q 6RM8025-6FS22 6RM8078-6FS22 6RM8091-6FS22 6RM8028-6FS22 6RM8082-6FS22 6RM8031-6FS22 6RM8085-6FS22 6RM8075-6FS22 6RM8087-6FS22 Table 10- 14 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 480 V AC, 60 A to 210 A, 2Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..25-6FS22 ..28-6FS22 ..31-6FS22 ..75-6FS22 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) Rated frequency 4) Armature rated input current V 3-ph 480 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Hz 50 A 49.8 74.7 104 174 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 50 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 512 614 713 1225 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 63 80 125 200 2) Armature circuit DC connection Rated DC voltage 1) V 575 Rated DC current A 60 90 125 210 kW 34.5 51.8 71.9 121 Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 390 390 Rated DC current A 10 10 10 15 Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10 % / -20 %), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 Current demand 3) A Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection 30 30 30 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 141 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A ..25-6FS22 ..28-6FS22 ..31-6FS22 ..75-6FS22 16 16 16 25 Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 0.35 to 0.5 0.9 to 1.25 0.9 to 1.25 0.9 to 1.25 Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Fan air flow m3/h 800 800 800 800 Fan noise level dBA 71 71 71 71 BC BC BC BC 233 238 240 273 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature without filter Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 63 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 125 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 125 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 250 A with fuses Terminal end 1x16 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x25 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x50 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x95 mm, M10 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Terminal strip -X0; modular terminal block AC armature with filter ST35, ST35-PE UK35, USLKG35 UKH50, USLKG50 UKH150, UKH150-GNYE 16 mm 25 mm 50 mm 95 mm 1x25 mm, M8 1x50 mm, M8 1x95 mm, M8 1.5 mm 1.5 mm 2.5 mm 2.5 mm 2.5 mm 4 mm 1C1, 1D1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter DC armature 1x16 mm, M8 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 Field DC ST4, ST4-PE 1.5 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 ST4, ST4-PE 2.5 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter Protective conductor PE ST6, ST6-PE 63 A auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x4 mm, M6 1x16 mm, M8 1x16 mm, M8 1x25 mm, M8 1x50 mm, M8 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 142 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Table 10- 15 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 480 V AC, 280 A to 850 A, 2Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..78-6FS22 ..82-6FS22 ..85-6FS22 ..87-6FS22 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) V 3-ph 480 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Rated frequency 4) Hz 50 Armature rated input current 2) A 232 374 498 706 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 50 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 1481 2377 3097 3983 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 250 400 500 710 Rated DC voltage 1) V 575 Rated DC current A 280 450 600 850 kW 161 259 345 489 Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 390 390 Rated DC current A 15 25 25 30 Armature circuit DC connection Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10 % / -20 %), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 30 30 30 25 50 50 63 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 0.9 to 1.25 2.8 to 4 7 to 10 7 to 10 Device fan Device fan Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Cabinet fan Device fan Fan air flow m3/h 800 800 800 800 Fan noise level dBA 71 73.8 73.8 64.5 BC CC CC DC 273 340 355 500 Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 630 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 800 A with fuses Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature without filter Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 400 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 630 A with fuses SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 143 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..78-6FS22 ..82-6FS22 ..85-6FS22 ..87-6FS22 Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end 1x120 mm, M10 2x120 mm, M12 2x150 mm, M12 2x240 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Terminal strip X0; modular terminal block AC armature with filter On the filter Customer connections Customer connections UKH150, UKH150-GNYE 120 mm 1x120 mm, M10 2x150 mm, M12 2x240 mm, M12 1C1, 1D1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter DC armature 2x50 mm, M8 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 Field DC ST4, ST4-PE ST6, ST6-PE 2.5 mm 4 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter 2x95 mm, M10 2x150 mm, M10 4x95 mm, M12 4 mm 4 mm Terminal strip -X1 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter ST6, ST6-PE ST16, ST16-PE 4 mm 10 mm ST35, ST35-PE 10 mm 16 mm 63 A auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker Protective conductor PE 1x4 mm, M6 1x10 mm, M6 1x10 mm, M6 1x16 mm, M6 1x70 mm, M8 1x120 mm, M10 1x150 mm, M10 2x120 mm, M12 Table 10- 16 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph. 480 V AC, 1,200 A, 2Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..91-6FS22 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) V 3-ph 480 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Hz 50 A 996 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 65 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 4857 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 5) V 575 Rated frequency 4) Armature rated input current 2) Armature circuit DC connection Rated DC voltage 1) Rated DC current A 1200 kW 690 Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 Rated DC current A 30 Rated power Field circuit SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 144 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..91-6FS22 Auxiliaries power connection Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10 % / -20 %), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A 63 Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 11 to 16 Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Device fan Fan air flow m3/h 1000 Fan noise level dBA 66 Cabinet DC Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg 570 Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature without filter 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature with filter 1C1, 1D1 DC armature 3C, 3D Field DC Customer connections Terminal end 4x150 mm, M12 Customer connections 4x150 mm, M12 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter 4x185 mm, M12 Terminal strip X3 ST6, ST6-PE 4 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip X1 ST35, ST35-PE 16 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter Terminal strip X1 ST35, ST35-PE 16 mm Protective conductor PE 2x150 mm, M12 6) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 145 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 575 V AC, 2Q 6RM8025-6GS22 6RM8081-6GS22 6RM8093-4GS22 6RM8031-6GS22 6RM8085-6GS22 6RM8095-4GS22 6RM8075-6GS22 6RM8087-6GS22 6RM8096-4GS22 6RM8090-6GS22 6RM8097-4GS22 Table 10- 17 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 575 V AC, 60 A to 210 A, 2Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..25-6GS22 ..31-6GS22 ..75-6GS22 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) V 3-ph 575 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Rated frequency 4) Hz 50 Armature rated input current 2) A 49.8 104 174 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 487 762 1284 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 63 125 200 Rated DC voltage 1) V 690 Rated DC current A 60 125 210 41.4 86.3 145 Armature circuit DC connection Rated power kW Field circuit Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 390 Rated DC current A 10 10 15 Auxiliaries power connection Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / 20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 30 30 16 16 25 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 0.35 to 0.5 0.9 to 1.25 0.9 to 1.25 Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Fan air flow m3/h 800 800 800 Fan noise level dBA 71 71 71 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 146 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..25-6GS22 ..31-6GS22 ..75-6GS22 BC BC BC 233 240 273 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature without filter Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 63 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 125 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 250 A with fuses Terminal end 1x16 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x50 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x95 mm, M10 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Terminal strip -X0; modular terminal block AC armature with filter ST35, ST35-PE UKH50, USLKG50 UKH150, UKH150-GNYE 16 mm 50 mm 95 mm 1C1, 1D1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter DC armature 1x16 mm, M8 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 Field DC ST4, ST4-PE 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 1.5 mm 1x50 mm, M8 1x95 mm, M8 1.5 mm 2.5 mm ST4, ST4-PE 2.5 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter ST6, ST6-PE 2.5 mm 4 mm 63 A auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker Protective conductor PE 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x4 mm, M6 1x16 mm, M8 1x25 mm, M8 1x50 mm, M8 Table 10- 18 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 575 V AC, 400 A to 1,100 A, 2Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..81-6GS22 ..85-6GS22 ..87-6GS22 ..90-6GS22 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) Rated frequency 4) Armature rated input current V 3-ph. 575 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Hz 50 A 332 498 664 913 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 65 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 2439 3190 3932 4583 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 355 500 710 5) 2) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 147 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..81-6GS22 ..85-6GS22 ..87-6GS22 ..90-6GS22 Armature circuit DC connection Rated DC voltage 1) Rated DC current V 690 A 400 600 800 1100 kW 276 414 552 759 Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 390 390 Rated DC current A 25 25 30 30 Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / 20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 30 30 30 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A 50 50 63 63 Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 2.8 to 4 7 to 10 7 to 10 11 to 16 Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Device fan Device fan Device fan Device fan Fan air flow m3/h 800 800 800 1000 Fan noise level dBA 73.8 73.8 64.5 66 CC CC DC DC 335 355 515 600 Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 800 A with fuses Customer connections Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature without filter Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 400 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 630 A with fuses Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end 1x185 mm, M10 2x150 mm, M12 2x240 mm, M12 4x150 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature with filter On the Filter Customer connections Customer connections Customer connections 1x185 mm, M10 2x150 mm, M12 2x240 mm, M12 4x150 mm, M12 1C1, 1D1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter DC armature 1x185 mm, M10 2x150 mm, M10 4x95 mm, M12 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 Field DC ST6, ST6-PE 4 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter 4 mm 4 mm 4x120 mm, M12 4 mm Terminal strip -X1 ST16, ST16-PE 10 mm ST35, ST35-PE 10 mm 16 mm 16 mm SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 148 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..81-6GS22 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter 63 A auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker ..85-6GS22 ..87-6GS22 Terminal strip X1 ..90-6GS22 1x10 mm, M6 1x10 mm, M6 16 mm 1x95 mm, M10 1x150 mm, M10 2x120 mm, M12 2x150 mm, M12 ST35, ST35-PE Protective conductor PE 1x16 mm, M6 6) Table 10- 19 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph. 575 V AC, 1,600 A to 2,800 A, 2Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..93-4GS22 ..95-4GS22 ..96-4GS22 ..97-4GS22 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) V 3-ph 575 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Rated frequency 4) Hz 50 Armature rated input current 2) A 1328 1660 1826 2324 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 75 75 75 75 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 6988 8090 8408 11937 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 5) 5) 5) 5) V 690 A 1600 2000 2200 2800 kW 1104 1380 1518 1932 Armature circuit DC connection Rated DC voltage 1) Rated DC current Rated power Field circuit Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 390 390 Rated DC current A 40 40 40 40 Auxiliaries power connection Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / 20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 50 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A 100 100 100 100 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer with option L85 A 125 125 125 125 Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 2 x (11 to 16) 2 x (11 to 16) 2 x (11 to 16) 2 x (11 to 16) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 149 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..93-4GS22 ..95-4GS22 ..96-4GS22 ..97-4GS22 Device fan Device fan Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Device fan Device fan Fan air flow m3/h 2400 2400 2400 2400 Fan noise level dBA 77.0 77.0 77.0 77.0 EC EC EC EC 775 830 930 1010 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature without filter Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end 6x150 mm, M12 6x185 mm, M12 8x150 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature with filter 6x150 mm, M12 6x185 mm, M12 8x150 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 1C1, 1D1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter DC armature 7) 8x95 mm, M12 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 DC field without/with option L85 ST10, ST10-PE / UK35, USLKG35 6 mm2/25 mm 8x150 mm, M12 8x185 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 6 mm2/25 mm 6 mm2/25 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 without/with option L85 UKH50, USLKG50 / UKH50, USLKG50 35 mm/50 mm 35 mm/50 mm 35 mm/50 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter Terminal strip -X1 without/with option L85 UKH50, USLKG50 / UKH50, USLKG50 35 mm/50 mm Protective conductor PE 35 mm/50 mm 6 mm2/25 mm 35 mm/50 mm 35 mm/50 mm 35 mm/50 mm 3x240 mm, M12 3x240 mm, M12 3x240 mm, M12 4x240 mm, M12 6) 6) 6) 6) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 150 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 690 V AC, 2Q 6RM8086-6KS22 6RM8093-4KS22 6RM8090-6KS22 6RM8095-4KS22 6RM8097-4KS22 Table 10- 20 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 690 V AC, 720 A to 1,000 A, 2Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..86-6KS22 ..90-6KS22 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) V 3-ph 690 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Rated frequency 4) Hz 50 Armature rated input current 2) A 598 830 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 65 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 4012 4642 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 630 5) Rated DC voltage 1) V 830 Rated DC current A 720 1000 kW 598 830 Armature circuit DC connection Rated power Field circuit Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 Rated DC current A 30 30 Auxiliaries power connection Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / 20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 30 63 63 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 7 to 10 11 to 16 Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Device fan Device fan Fan air flow m3/h 800 1000 Fan noise level dBA 66 64.5 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 151 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..86-6KS22 ..90-6KS22 DC DC 515 600 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 800 A with fuses AC armature without filter Customer connections Terminal end Terminal end 2x240 mm, M12 4x120 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature with filter Customer connections Customer connections 1C1, 1D1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter DC armature 4x95 mm, M12 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 Field DC ST6, ST6-PE 2x240 mm, M12 4x120 mm, M12 4 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter 4x120 mm, M12 4 mm Terminal strip -X1 ST35, ST35-PE 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter Protective conductor PE 16 mm 16 mm Auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker, 63 A Terminal strip X1 1x16 mm, M6 16 mm ST35, ST35-PE 2x120 mm, M12 2x150 mm, M12 6) Table 10- 21 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 690 V AC, 1,500 A to 2,600 A, 2Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..93-4KS22 ..95-4KS22 ..97-4KS22 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) V 3-ph 690 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Rated frequency 4) Hz 50 Armature rated input current 2) A 1245 1660 2158 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 75 75 75 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 7627 9175 12007 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 5) 5) 5) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 152 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..93-4KS22 ..95-4KS22 ..97-4KS22 Armature circuit DC connection Rated DC voltage 1) Rated DC current V 830 A 1500 2000 2600 kW 1245 1660 2158 Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 390 Rated DC current A 40 40 40 Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / 20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A 100 100 100 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer with option L85 A 125 125 125 Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 2 x (11 to 16) 2 x (11 to 16) 2 x (11 to 16) Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Device fan Device fan Fan air flow m3/h 2400 Device fan 2400 2400 Fan noise level dBA 77 77 77 EC EC FC 795 830 1050 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature without filter Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end 6x120 mm, M12 6x185 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature with filter 6x120 mm, M12 6x185 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 1C1, 1D1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter DC armature 7) 8x95 mm, M12 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 DC field without/with option L85 ST10, ST10-PE / UK35, USLKG35 6 mm/25 mm 8x150 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 6 mm/25 mm 6 mm/25 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 without/with option L85 UKH50, USLKG50 / UKH50, USLKG50 35 mm/50 mm 35 mm/50 mm 35 mm/50 mm SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 153 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..93-4KS22 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter Terminal strip -X1 without/with option L85 UKH50, USLKG50 / UKH50, USLKG50 Protective conductor PE 3x240 mm, M12 3x240 mm, M12 4x240 mm, M12 35 mm/50 mm 6) ..95-4KS22 ..97-4KS22 35 mm/50 mm 6) 35 mm/50 mm 6) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 830 V AC, 2Q 6RM8088-6LS22 6RM8093-4LS22 6RM8095-4LS22 Table 10- 22 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 830 V AC, 950 A to 1,900 A, 2Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..88-6LS22 ..93-4LS22 ..95-4LS22 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) Rated frequency 4) Armature rated input current V 3-ph. 830 V AC (+10 % / - 20 %) Hz 50 A 789 1245 1577 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 4911 8039 9986 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 5) 5) 5) 2) Armature circuit DC connection Rated DC voltage 1) V 1000 Rated DC current A 950 1500 1900 kW 950 1500 1900 Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 390 Rated DC current A 30 40 40 Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / 20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 30 30 Current demand 3) A 63 100 100 - 125 125 Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer with option L85 A SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 154 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..88-6LS22 ..93-4LS22 ..95-4LS22 Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 11 to 16 2 x (11 to 16) 2 x (11 to 16) Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Device fan Device fan Fan air flow m3/h 1000 Device fan 2400 2400 Fan noise level dBA 66 77 77 DC EC EC 600 825 905 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature without filter Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end 4x120 mm, M12 6x120 mm, M12 6x185 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature with filter 4x120 mm, M12 6x120 mm, M12 6x185 mm, M12 1C1, 1D1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter DC armature 4x120 mm, M12 8x95 mm, M12 7) 8x150 mm, M12 7) 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 DC field without/with option L85 ST6, ST6-PE / - ST10, ST10-PE / UK35, USLKG35 4 mm/- 6 mm/25 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 without/with option L85 ST35, ST35-PE / UKH50, USLKG50 / UKH50, USLKG50 16 mm/- 35 mm/50 mm 6 mm/25 mm 35 mm/50 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter Terminal strip -X1 without/with option L85 ST35, ST35-PE / UKH50, USLKG50 / UKH50, USLKG50 16 mm/- Protective conductor PE 35 mm/50 mm 35 mm/50 mm 2x120 mm, M12 3x240 mm, M12 3x240 mm, M12 6) 6) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 155 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 400 V AC, 4Q 6RM8013-6DV62 6RM8031-6DV62 6RM8081-6DV62 6RM8093-4DV62 6RM8018-6DV62 6RM8075-6DV62 6RM8085-6DV62 6RM8095-4DV62 6RM8025-6DV62 6RM8078-6DV62 6RM8087-6DV62 6RM8098-4DV62 6RM8028-6DV62 6RM8091-6DV62 Table 10- 23 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 400 V AC, 15 A to 90 A, 4Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..13-6DV62 ..18-6DV62 ..25-6DV62 ..28-6DV62 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) V 3-ph 400 V AC (+15 % / -20 %) Rated frequency 4) Hz 50 Armature rated input current 2) A 12.5 24.9 49.8 74.7 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 50 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 292 372 485 587 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 20 30 63 80 Rated DC voltage 1) V 420 Rated DC current A 15 30 60 90 kW 6.3 12.6 25.2 37.8 Rated DC voltage 1) V 325 325 325 325 Rated DC current A 3 5 10 10 Armature circuit DC connection Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 400 V AC (+15% / -20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 30 30 30 16 16 16 16 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 0.14 to 0.2 0.35 to 0.5 0.35 to 0.5 0.9 to 1.25 Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Fan air flow m3/h 800 800 800 800 Fan noise level dBA 71 71 71 71 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 156 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..13-6DV62 ..18-6DV62 ..25-6DV62 ..28-6DV62 BC BC BC BC 233 213 233 233 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature without filter Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 63 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 63 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 63 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 125 A with fuses Terminal end 1x2.5 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x6 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x16 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x25 mm, M6 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Terminal strip -X0; modular terminal block AC armature with filter ST4, ST4-PE ST10, ST10-PE ST35, ST35-PE UK35, USLKG35 2.5 mm 6 mm 16 mm 25 mm 1x6 mm, M8 1x16 mm, M8 1x25 mm, M8 1.5 mm 1.5 mm 1.5 mm 2.5 mm 2.5 mm 2.5 mm 1C1, 1D1 Motor connection, DC fuse DC armature 1x2.5 mm, M8 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 Field DC ST4, ST4-PE 1.5 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 ST4, ST4-PE 2.5 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter 63 A auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker Protective conductor PE 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x16 mm, M8 1x16 mm, M8 1x16 mm, M8 1x16 mm, M8 Table 10- 24 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 400 V AC, 125 A to 280 A, 4Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..31-6DV62 ..75-6DV62 ..78-6DV62 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) Rated frequency 4) Armature rated input current V 3-ph 400 V AC (+15 % / -20 %) Hz 50 A 104 174 232 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 726 1202 1557 125 200 250 2) Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) Armature circuit DC connection Rated DC voltage 1) V 420 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 157 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..31-6DV62 ..75-6DV62 ..78-6DV62 A 125 210 280 kW 52.5 88.2 118 Rated DC voltage 1) V 325 325 325 Rated DC current A 10 15 15 Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 400 V AC (+15% / -20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 30 30 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A 16 25 25 Rated DC current Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 0.9 to 1.25 0.9 to 1.25 0.9 to 1.25 Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Fan air flow m3/h 800 800 800 Fan noise level dBA 71 71 71 BC BC BC 240 263 273 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature without filter Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 125 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 250 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 400 A with fuses Terminal end 1x50 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x95 mm, M10 Terminal end 1x120 mm, M10 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Terminal strip -X0; modular terminal block AC armature with filter UKH50, USLKG50 UKH150, UKH150-GNYE 50 mm 95 mm 1C1, 1D1 120 mm Motor connection, DC fuse DC armature 1x50 mm, M8 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 Field DC ST4, ST4-PE 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 1.5 mm 1x95 mm, M8 2x50 mm, M8 2.5 mm 2.5 mm ST4, ST4-PE ST6, ST6-PE 2.5 mm 4 mm 4 mm SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 158 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..31-6DV62 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter 63 A auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker Protective conductor PE ..75-6DV62 ..78-6DV62 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x4 mm, M6 1x4 mm, M6 1x25 mm, M8 1x50 mm, M8 1x70 mm, M8 Table 10- 25 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 400 V AC, 400 A to 1,200 A, 4Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..81-6DV62 ..85-6DV62 ..87-6DV62 ..91-6DV62 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) Rated frequency 4) Armature rated input current V 3-ph 400 V AC (+15 % / -20 %) Hz 50 A 332 498 706 996 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 65 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 2226 2984 3939 4697 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 355 500 710 5) 2) Armature circuit DC connection Rated DC voltage 1) V 420 Rated DC current A 400 600 850 1200 kW 168 252 357 504 Rated DC voltage 1) V 325 325 325 390 Rated DC current A 25 25 30 30 Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 400 V AC (+15% / -20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 30 30 30 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A 50 50 63 63 Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / -20%), 50 Hz Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 2.8 to 4 7 to 10 7 to 10 11 to 16 Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Device fan Device fan Device fan Fan air flow m3/h 800 Device fan 800 800 1000 Fan noise level dBA 73.8 64.5 66 73.8 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 159 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..81-6DV62 ..85-6DV62 ..87-6DV62 ..91-6DV62 CC CC DC DC 320 340 490 570 Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 800 A with fuses Customer connections Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 400 A with fuses AC armature without filter Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 630 A with fuses Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end 1x185 mm, M10 2x150 mm, M12 2x240 mm, M12 4x150 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 On the Filter AC armature with filter Customer connections Customer connections Customer connections 1x185 mm, M10 2x150 mm, M12 2x240 mm, M12 4x150 mm, M12 1C1, 1D1 DC armature Motor connection, DC fuse SINAMICS DCM DC Converter 1x185 mm, M10 2x150 mm, M12 4x95 mm, M12 4x185 mm, M12 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 Field DC ST6, ST6-PE 4 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm Terminal strip -X1 ST16, ST16-PE 10 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter ST35, ST35-PE 10 mm 16 mm 16 mm 63 A auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker Terminal strip X1 1x10 mm, M6 1x10 mm, M6 16 mm 1x95 mm, M10 1x150 mm, M10 2x120 mm, M12 2x150 mm, M12 ST35, ST35-PE Protective conductor PE 1x16 mm, M6 6) Table 10- 26 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph. 400 V AC, 1,600 A to 3,000 A, 4Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..93-4DV62 ..95-4DV62 ..98-4DV62 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) V 3-ph 400 V AC (+15 % / -20 %) 3-ph 400 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Rated frequency 4) Hz 50 Armature rated input current 2) A 1328 1660 2490 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 75 75 75 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 6430 7618 11747 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 5) 5) 5) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 160 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..93-4DV62 ..95-4DV62 ..98-4DV62 Armature circuit DC connection Rated DC voltage 1) Rated DC current V 420 A 1600 2000 3000 kW 672 840 1260 Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 390 Rated DC current A 40 40 40 Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / 20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A 100 100 100 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer with option L85 A 125 125 125 Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 2 x (11 to 16) 2 x (11 to 16) 2 x (11 to 16) Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Device fan Device fan Fan air flow m3/h 2400 Device fan 2400 2400 Fan noise level dBA 77 77 77 EC EC EC 780 820 950 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature without filter Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end 6x150 mm, M12 6x185 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature with filter Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end 6x150 mm, M12 6x185 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 1C1, 1D1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter DC armature 7) 8x95 mm, M12 8x150 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 DC field without/with option L85 ST10, ST10-PE / UK35, USLKG35 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 without/with option L85 UKH50, USLKG50 / UKH50, USLKG50 6 mm/25 mm 6 mm/25 mm 6 mm/25 mm SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 161 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..93-4DV62 ..95-4DV62 ..98-4DV62 35 mm/50 mm 35 mm/50 mm 35 mm/50 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter Terminal strip -X1 without/with option L85 ST10, ST10-PE / UK35, USLKG35 35 mm/50 mm Protective conductor PE 35 mm/50 mm 35 mm/50 mm 3x240 mm, M12 3x240 mm, M12 4x240 mm, M12 6) 6) 6) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 480 V AC, 4Q 6RM8013-6FV62 6RM8031-6FV62 6RM8082-6FV62 6RM8018-6FV62 6RM8075-6FV62 6RM8085-6FV62 6RM8025-6FV62 6RM8078-6FV62 6RM8087-6FV62 6RM8028-6FV62 6RM8091-6FV62 Table 10- 27 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph. 480 V AC, 15 A to 90 A, 4Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..13-6FV62 ..18-6FV62 ..25-6FV62 ..28-6FV62 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) V 3-ph 480 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Rated frequency 4) Hz 50 Armature rated input current 2) A 12.5 24.9 49.8 74.7 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 50 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 292 377 534 609 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 20 32 63 80 Rated DC voltage 1) V 500 Rated DC current A 15 30 60 90 kW 6.3 15 30 45 Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 390 390 Rated DC current A 3 5 10 10 Armature circuit DC connection Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / 20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 30 30 30 16 16 16 16 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 162 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..13-6FV62 ..18-6FV62 ..25-6FV62 ..28-6FV62 Motor fan Rated supply voltage 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz Setting range of the motor circuit breaker A 0.14 to 0.2 0.35 to 0.5 0.35 to 0.5 0.9 to 1.25 Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Fan air flow m3/h 800 Cabinet fan 800 800 800 Fan noise level dBA 71 71 71 71 BC BC BC BC 210 215 233 238 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature without filter Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 63 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 63 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 63 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 125 A with fuses Terminal end 1x2.5 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x6 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x16 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x25 mm, M6 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Terminal strip -X0; modular terminal block AC armature with filter ST4, ST4-PE ST10, ST10-PE ST35, ST35-PE UK35, USLKG35 2.5 mm 6 mm 16 mm 25 mm 1x6 mm, M8 1x16 mm, M8 1x25 mm, M8 1.5 mm 1.5 mm 1.5 mm 2.5 mm 2.5 mm 2.5 mm 1C1, 1D1 Motor connection, DC fuse DC armature 1x2.5 mm, M8 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 Field DC ST4, ST4-PE 1.5 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 ST4, ST4-PE 2.5 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter 63 A auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker Protective conductor PE 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x16 mm, M8 1x16 mm, M8 1x16 mm, M8 1x16 mm, M8 Table 10- 28 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 480 V AC, 125 A to 280 A, 4Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..31-6FV62 ..75-6FV62 ..78-6FV62 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) Rated frequency 4) Armature rated input current 2) V 3-ph 480 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Hz 50 A 104 174 232 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 163 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..31-6FV62 ..75-6FV62 ..78-6FV62 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 748 1275 1556 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 125 200 250 Armature circuit DC connection Rated DC voltage 1) V 500 Rated DC current A 125 210 280 kW 62.5 105 140 Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 390 Rated DC current A 10 15 15 Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / 20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 30 30 A 16 25 25 Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection Current demand 3) Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 0.9 to 1.25 0.9 to 1.25 0.9 to 1.25 Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Fan air flow m3/h 800 800 800 Fan noise level dBA 71 71 71 BC BC BC 240 273 273 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature without filter Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 125 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 250 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 400 A with fuses Terminal end 1x50 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x95 mm, M10 Terminal end 1x120 mm, M10 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Terminal strip -X0; modular terminal block AC armature with filter UKH50, USLKG50 UKH150, UKH150-GNYE 50 mm 95 mm 1C1, 1D1 120 mm Motor connection, DC fuse SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 164 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..31-6FV62 ..75-6FV62 ..78-6FV62 DC armature 1x50 mm, M8 1x95 mm, M8 2x50 mm, M8 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 Field DC ST4, ST4-PE 2.5 mm 2.5 mm 1.5 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter ST4, ST4-PE ST6, ST6-PE 2.5 mm 4 mm 4 mm 63 A auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker Protective conductor PE 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x4 mm, M6 1x4 mm, M6 1x25 mm, M8 1x50 mm, M8 1x70 mm, M8 Table 10- 29 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 480 V AC, 450 A to 1,200 A, 4Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..82-6FV62 ..85-6FV62 ..87-6FV62 ..91-6FV62 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) Rated frequency 4) Armature rated input current V 3-ph 480 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Hz 50 A 374 498 706 996 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 65 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 2467 3197 4303 4857 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 400 500 710 5) V 500 2) Armature circuit DC connection Rated DC voltage 1) Rated DC current A 450 600 850 1200 kW 225 300 425 600 Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 390 390 Rated DC current A 25 25 30 30 Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / 20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 30 30 30 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A 50 50 63 63 Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection Motor fan Rated supply voltage 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 165 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. Setting range of the motor circuit breaker A ..82-6FV62 ..85-6FV62 ..87-6FV62 ..91-6FV62 2.8 to 4 7 to 10 7 to 10 11 to 16 Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Device fan Device fan Device fan Device fan Fan air flow m3/h 800 800 800 1000 Fan noise level dBA 73.8 73.8 64.5 66 CC CC DC DC 340 355 500 570 Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 800 A with fuses Customer connections Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature without filter Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 630 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 630 A with fuses Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end 2x120 mm, M12 2x150 mm, M12 2x240 mm, M12 4x150 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 On the filter AC armature with filter 1x120 mm, M10 2x150 mm, M12 2x240 mm, M12 4x150 mm, M12 1C1, 1D1 Motor connection, DC fuse SINAMICS DCM DC Converter 2x95 mm, M10 2x150 mm, M10 4x95 mm, M12 4x185 mm, M12 4 mm 4 mm DC armature 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 Field DC ST6, ST6-PE 4 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Customer connections Terminal strip -X1 ST16, ST16-PE 10 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter 4 mm ST35, ST35-PE 10 mm 16 mm 63 A auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker 16 mm Terminal strip X1 ST35, ST35-PE 1x10 mm, M6 Protective conductor PE 1x10 mm, M6 1x16 mm, M6 16 mm 1x120 mm, M10 1x150 mm, M10 2x120 mm, M12 2x150 mm, M12 6) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 166 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 575 V AC, 4Q 6RM8025-6GV62 6RM8081-6GV62 6RM8093-4GV62 6RM8031-6GV62 6RM8085-6GV62 6RM8095-4GV62 6RM8075-6GV62 6RM8087-6GV62 6RM8096-4GV62 6RM8090-6GV62 6RM8097-4GV62 Table 10- 30 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 575 V AC, 60 A to 210 A, 4Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..25-6GV62 ..31-6GV62 ..75-6GV62 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) V 3-ph. 575 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Rated frequency 4) Hz 50 Armature rated input current 2) A 49.8 104 174 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 509 797 1320 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 63 125 200 Rated DC voltage 1) V 600 Rated DC current A 60 125 210 kW 35 75 126 Armature circuit DC connection Rated power Field circuit Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 390 Rated DC current A 10 10 15 Auxiliaries power connection Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / 20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 30 30 16 16 25 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 0.35 to 0.5 0.9 to 1.25 0.9 to 1.25 Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Cabinet fan Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Fan air flow m3/h 800 800 800 Fan noise level dBA 71 71 71 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 167 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..25-6GV62 ..31-6GV62 ..75-6GV62 BC BC BC 233 240 273 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature without filter Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 63 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 125 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 250 A with fuses Terminal end 1x16 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x50 mm, M6 Terminal end 1x95 mm, M10 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Terminal strip -X0; modular terminal block AC armature with filter ST35, ST35-PE UKH50, USLKG50 UKH150, UKH150-GNYE 16 mm 50 mm 95 mm 1C1, 1D1 Motor connection, DC fuse DC armature 1x16 mm, M8 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 Field DC ST4, ST4-PE 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 1.5 mm 1x50 mm, M8 1x95 mm, M8 2.5 mm 2.5 mm ST4, ST4-PE 2.5 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter ST6, ST6-PE 2.5 mm 4 mm 63 A auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker Protective conductor PE 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x2.5 mm, M6 1x4 mm, M6 1x16 mm, M8 1x25 mm, M8 1x50 mm, M8 Table 10- 31 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 575 V AC, 400 A to 1,100 A, 4Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..81-6GV62 ..85-6GV62 ..87-6GV62 ..90-6GV62 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) Rated frequency 4) Armature rated input current V 3-ph. 575 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Hz 50 A 332 498 706 913 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 65 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 2534 3290 4112 4583 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 355 500 710 5) 2) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 168 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..81-6GV62 ..85-6GV62 ..87-6GV62 ..90-6GV62 Armature circuit DC connection Rated DC voltage 1) Rated DC current V 600 A 400 600 850 1100 kW 240 360 510 660 Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 390 390 Rated DC current A 25 25 30 30 Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / 20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 30 30 30 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A 50 50 63 63 Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 2.8 to 4 7 to 10 7 to 10 11 to 16 Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Device fan Device fan Device fan Device fan Fan air flow m3/h 800 800 800 1000 Fan noise level dBA 73.8 73.8 64.5 66 CC CC DC DC 335 355 515 600 Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 800 A with fuses Customer connections Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature without filter Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 400 A with fuses Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 630 A with fuses Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end 1x185 mm, M10 2x150 mm, M12 2x240 mm, M12 4x150 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 AC armature with filter 1C1, 1D1 DC armature On the filter Customer connections Customer connections 1x185 mm, M10 2x150 mm, M12 2x240 mm, M12 4x150 mm, M12 Motor connection, DC fuse SINAMICS DCM DC Converter 1x185 mm, M10 2x150 mm, M10 4x95 mm, M12 4x120 mm, M12 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 Field DC ST6, ST6-PE 4 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Customer connections 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm Terminal strip -X1 ST16, ST16-PE ST35, ST35-PE SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 169 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter ..81-6GV62 ..85-6GV62 ..87-6GV62 ..90-6GV62 10 mm 10 mm 16 mm 16 mm 63 A auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker Terminal strip X1 ST35, ST35-PE Protective conductor PE 1x10 mm, M6 1x10 mm, M6 1x16 mm, M6 16 mm 1x95 mm, M10 1x150 mm, M10 2x120 mm, M12 2x150 mm, M12 6) Table 10- 32 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph. 575 V AC, 1,600 A to 2,800 A, 4Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..93-4GV62 ..95-4GV62 ..96-4GV62 ..97-4GV62 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) Rated frequency 4) Armature rated input current V 3-ph. 575 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Hz 50 A 1328 1660 1826 2324 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 75 75 75 75 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 6988 8090 8408 11937 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 5) 5) 5) 5) 2) Armature circuit DC connection Rated DC voltage 1) V 600 Rated DC current A 1600 2000 2200 2800 kW 960 1200 1320 1680 Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 390 390 Rated DC current A 40 40 40 40 Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / 20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 50 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A 100 100 100 100 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer with option L85 A 125 125 125 125 Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 2 x (11 to 16) 2 x (11 to 16) 2 x (11 to 16) 2 x (11 to 16) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 170 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..93-4GV62 ..95-4GV62 ..96-4GV62 ..97-4GV62 Device fan Device fan Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Device fan Device fan Fan air flow m3/h 2400 2400 2400 2400 Fan noise level dBA 77.0 77.0 77.0 77.0 EC EC EC EC 795 850 950 1030 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature without filter Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end 6x150 mm, M12 6x185 mm, M12 8x150 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature with filter 6x150 mm, M12 6x185 mm, M12 8x150 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 1C1, 1D1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter DC armature 7) 8x95 mm, M12 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 DC field without/with option L85 ST10, ST10-PE / UK35, USLKG35 6 mm/25 mm 8x150 mm, M12 8x185 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 6 mm/25 mm 6 mm/25 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 without/with option L85 UKH50, USLKG50 / UKH50, USLKG50 35 mm/50 mm2 35 mm/50 mm2 35 mm/50 mm2 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter Terminal strip -X1 without/with option L85 UKH50, USLKG50 / UKH50, USLKG50 35 mm/50 mm2 Protective conductor PE 35 mm/50 mm2 35 mm/50 mm2 6 mm/25 mm 35 mm/50 mm2 35 mm/50 mm2 3x240 mm, M12 3x240 mm, M12 3x240 mm, M12 4x240 mm, M12 6) 6) 6) 6) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 171 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 690 V AC, 4Q 6RM8086-6KV62 6RM8093-4KV62 6RM8090-6KV62 6RM8095-4KV62 6RM8097-4KV62 Table 10- 33 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 690 V AC, 760 A to 1,000 A, 4Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..86-6KV62 ..90-6KV62 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) V 3-ph 690 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Rated frequency 4) Hz 50 Armature rated input current 2) A 631 830 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 65 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 4352 4642 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 630 5) Rated DC voltage 1) V 725 Rated DC current A 760 1000 kW 551 725 Armature circuit DC connection Rated power Field circuit Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 Rated DC current A 30 30 Auxiliaries power connection Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / 20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 30 30 63 63 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 7 to 10 11 to 16 Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Device fan Device fan Fan air flow m3/h 800 1000 Fan noise level dBA 66 64.5 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 172 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..86-6KV62 ..90-6KV62 DC DC 515 600 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Incoming feeder circuit breaker, 800 A with fuses AC armature without filter Customer connections Terminal end Terminal end 2x240 mm, M12 4x120 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature with filter Customer connections 2x240 mm, M12 4x120 mm, M12 1C1, 1D1 DC armature Motor connection, DC fuse SINAMICS DCM DC Converter 4x95 mm, M12 4x120 mm, M12 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 Field DC ST6, ST6-PE 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 4 mm 4 mm ST 35, ST 35-PE 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter Protective conductor PE 16 mm 16 mm Auxiliary incoming feeder circuit breaker, 63 A Terminal strip X1 1x16 mm, M6 16 mm ST35, ST35-PE 2x120 mm, M12 2x150 mm, M12 6) Table 10- 34 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 690 V AC, 1,500 A to 2,600 A, 4Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..93-4KV62 ..95-4KV62 ..97-4KV62 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) Rated frequency 4) Armature rated input current V 3-ph 690 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Hz 50 A 1245 1660 2158 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 75 75 75 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 7627 9175 12007 2) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 173 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) ..93-4KV62 ..95-4KV62 ..97-4KV62 A 5) 5) 5) V 725 A 1500 2000 2600 kW 1088 1450 1885 Armature circuit DC connection Rated DC voltage 1) Rated DC current Rated power Field circuit Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 390 Rated DC current A 40 40 40 Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10% / 20%), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A 100 100 100 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer with option L85 A 125 125 125 Auxiliaries power connection Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 2 x (11 to 16) 2 x (11 to 16) 2 x (11 to 16) Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Device fan Device fan Fan air flow m3/h 2400 Device fan 2400 2400 Fan noise level dBA 77 77 77 EC EC FC 815 850 1070 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature without filter Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end 6x120 mm, M12 6x185 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature with filter 6x120 mm, M12 6x185 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 1C1, 1D1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter DC armature 7) 8x95 mm, M12 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 DC field without/with option L85 ST10, ST10-PE / UK35, USLKG35 6 mm/25 mm 8x150 mm, M12 8x240 mm, M12 6 mm/25 mm 6 mm/25 mm SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 174 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..93-4KV62 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 without/with option L85 UKH50, USLKG50 / UKH50, USLKG50 35 mm/50 mm2 ..95-4KV62 35 mm/50 mm2 ..97-4KV62 35 mm/50 mm2 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter Terminal strip -X1 without/with option L85 UKH50, USLKG50 / UKH50, USLKG50 35 mm/50 mm2 Protective conductor PE 35 mm/50 mm2 35 mm/50 mm2 3x240 mm, M12 3x240 mm, M12 4x240 mm, M12 6) 6) 6) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 830 V AC, 4Q 6RM8088-6LV62 6RM8093-4LV62 6RM8095-4LV62 Table 10- 35 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 830 V AC, 950 A to 1,900 A, 4Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..88-6LV62 ..93-4LV62 ..95-4LV62 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) Rated frequency 4) Armature rated input current V 3-ph. 830 V AC (+10 % / -20 %) Hz 50 A 789 1245 1577 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 4911 8039 9986 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 5) 5) 5) 2) Armature circuit DC connection Rated DC voltage 1) V 875 Rated DC current A 950 1500 1900 kW 831 1313 1663 Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 390 Rated DC current A 30 40 40 Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10 % / -20 %), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 50 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A 63 100 100 Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 175 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer with option L85 A ..88-6LV62 ..93-4LV62 ..95-4LV62 - 125 125 Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 11 to 16 2 x (11 to 16) 2 x (11 to 16) Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Device fan Device fan Fan air flow m3/h 1000 Device fan 2400 2400 Fan noise level dBA 66 77 77 DC EC EC 600 845 925 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature without filter Terminal end Terminal end Terminal end 4x120 mm, M12 6x120 mm, M12 6x185 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature with filter 4x120 mm, M12 6x120 mm, M12 6x185 mm, M12 1C1, 1D1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter DC armature 4x150 mm, M12 8x95 mm, M12 8x150 mm, M12 7) 7) 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 DC field without/with option L85 ST6, ST6-PE / - ST10, ST10-PE / UK35, USLKG35 4 mm/- 6 mm/25 mm 6 mm/25 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 without/with option L85 ST35, ST35-PE / UKH50, USLKG50 / UKH50, USLKG50 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter Terminal strip -X1 without/with option L85 ST35, ST35-PE / UKH50, USLKG50 / UKH50, USLKG50 16 mm/- 16 mm/Protective conductor PE 35 mm/50 mm 35 mm/50 mm 35 mm/50 mm 35 mm/50 mm 2x120 mm, M12 3x240 mm, M12 3x240 mm, M12 6) 6) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph 950 V AC, 2Q and 4Q 6RM8096-4MS22 6RM8096-4MV62 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 176 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Table 10- 36 Technical specifications for SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 3-ph. 950 V AC, 2,200 A, 2Q and 4Q; explanation of footnotes following tables. Order number 6RM80.. ..96-4MS22 ..96-4MV62 Power section Armature rated connection voltage 1) V 3-ph. 950 V AC (+15 % / - 20 %) Rated frequency 4) Hz 50 Armature rated input current 2) A 1826 1826 Armature circuit short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 Power loss at rated DC current (approx.) W 12957 12957 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer (LV HRC fuse gL/gG) A 5) 5) Rated DC voltage 1) V 1140 1000 Rated DC current A 2200 2200 kW 2508 2200 Rated DC voltage 1) V 390 390 Rated DC current A 40 40 Armature circuit DC connection Rated power Field circuit Auxiliaries power connection Rated supply voltage 1) V 2-ph 480 V AC (+10 % / -20 %), 50 Hz Auxiliary supply short-circuit current capability kA 50 50 Current demand 3) A Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer A 100 100 Maximum permissible protection provided by the customer with option L85 A 125 125 Motor fan Rated supply voltage Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz / 3-ph 460 V AC, 60 Hz A 2 x (11 to 16) 2 x (11 to 16) Device fan Device fan Cabinet cooling Type of cooling Fan air flow m3/h 2400 2400 Fan noise level dBA 77 77 FC FC 1050 1070 Cabinet Frame size (for dimensions, see Chapter Design (Page 20)) Weight without options (approx.) kg Connection: Connection point, connection technology, connection cross-section For tightening torques, see tables. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 177 Technical specifications 10.3 Technical specifications Order number 6RM80.. ..96-4MS22 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections ..96-4MV62 AC armature without filter Terminal end Terminal end 8x150 mm, M12 8x150 mm, M12 1U1, 1V1, 1W1 Customer connections AC armature with filter 8x150 mm, M12 8x150 mm, M12 1C1, 1D1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter DC armature 7) 8x185 mm, M12 8x185 mm, M12 3C, 3D Terminal strip -X3 DC field without/with option L85 ST10, ST10-PE / UK35, USLKG35 6 mm/25 mm 6 mm/25 mm 3-ph AC auxiliary supply with filter Terminal strip -X1 without/with option L85 UKH50, USLKG50 / UKH50, USLKG50 3-ph AC auxiliary supply without filter Terminal strip -X1 without/with option L85 UKH50, USLKG50 / UKH50, USLKG50 35 mm/50 mm 35 mm/50 mm Protective conductor PE 35 mm/50 mm 35 mm/50 mm 3x240 mm, M12 3x240 mm, M12 6) 6) Footnotes: 1) The supply voltage for the armature/field can lie below the rated armature/field voltage (set in p50078): Permissible input voltage: 50 V for devices with rated voltage 400 V, 480 V and 575 V 100 V for units with rated voltage 690 V, 830 V and 950 V The output voltage is reduced accordingly. The specified DC output voltage can be ensured for an undervoltage up to 95 % of the line voltage (rated supply voltage of the armature/field). Note: Option L04 is available for armature infeed with extra-low voltage (ordering data for options, see Catalog 23.2) 2) Values apply to output rated DC 3) Take into account options 4) Other line frequency available as an option. 5) A circuit breaker is used 6) Max. short-circuit duration: 200 ms 7) When connecting the 240 mm2 motor cables directly to the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, only terminal ends according to DIN46234 may be used SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 178 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Technical specifications 10.4 Cable types Tightening torques for current-carrying parts When securing connections for current-carrying parts (motor connections, busbars), you must observe the following tightening torques. Table 10- 37 Tightening torques for connecting current-carrying parts Screw Torque M6 6 Nm M8 13 Nm M10 25 Nm M12 50 Nm See appendix for tightening torques for screw terminals 10.4 Cable types For the customer cabling in the cabinet (from the introduction in the base to the connections), the insulation voltage for safe electrical separation must be maintained as a minimum. Table 10- 38 AC/DC armature: Specified insulation voltages for customer cabling IT system TN / TT supply systems AC armature supply voltage Insulation voltage U0 Insulation voltage U0 Insulation voltage U0 Insulation voltage U0 Protective electrical separation Basic insulation Protective electrical separation Basic insulation 400 V 800 V 400 V 300 V 230 V 480 V 960 V 480 V 300 V 280 V 575 V 1150 V 575 V 660 V 330 V 690 V 1380 V 690 V 800 V 400 V 830 V 1660 V 830 V 960 V 480 V 950 V 1900 V 950 V 1100 V 550 V For line supplies with a grounded line conductor, the insulation voltage must be according to the specifications for IT supply systems. Table 10- 39 AC auxiliary supply: Specified insulation voltage for customer cabling TN / TT supply systems AC auxiliary supply Insulation voltage U0 400 V 300 V 480 V 300 V SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 179 Technical specifications 10.4 Cable types Table 10- 40 Additional customer cabling: specified insulation voltage Insulation voltage U0 PROFIBUS cable / PROFINET 300 V DRIVE-CLiQ cable *) 100 V Cable to the AOP30 operator panel 300 V Patch cable (parallel connecting cable) 300 V Peer-to-peer cable 300 V Analog tachometer cable 300 V Cables to the Terminal Module Cabinet (TMC) 100 V Cable for input coupling relay 300 V Cable, DC field implemented the same as the AC auxiliary voltage * ) The DRIVE-CLiQ cable must be routed separately from the remaining cables with higher voltages. Table 10- 41 Options, customer cabling: specified insulation voltage Option Insulation voltage U0 A06, A30, A97, B30, B83, C51, D19, D20, D21, G60, G62, K50, L07, L50, L55, L57, L59, L82, L86, L87, L88, V70-V74, W20-W41, W70-W91, Y51, Y52-Y56, Y60 300 V L00 implemented the same as the AC armature voltage Temperature range for all cables is at least -25/+60 C SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 180 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 11 Options 11.1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter 11.1.1 G00, Advanced CUD left Category SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Function Advanced CUD in the left-hand slot. In addition to the connections and functions of the standard CUD, the Advanced CUD has two DRIVE-CLiQ connections and one option slot. The use of an Advanced CUD also provides the opportunity of inserting an additional CUD (Standard or Advanced) to increase the computational performance and the number of terminals. This can be used, e.g. to implement additional technological functions. By using an Advanced CUD, which instead of the standard CUD is located in the lefthand slot, the SINAMICS SMC30, TM15, TM31 components can be connected using DRIVE-CLiQ and CBE20 can be inserted in the OMI slot. Connection The connections of the Advanced CUD installed at the left are routed to a TMC terminal module. This terminal module has the designation -X71 and is suitable as customer connection. See the description of the terminal module TMC. Commissioning Refer to the operating instructions for the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter as well as the circuit diagram with connection suggestion in the operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter, electrical installation. Parameter assignment See the List Manual SINAMICS DCM. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 181 Options 11.1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Diagnostics See the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter operating instructions Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& )UDPHVL]HV%&&& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-1 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 182 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter 11.1.2 G10, standard CUD right Category SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Function Standard CUD in the right-hand slot (precondition, option G00). Selecting option G10 provides the possibility of further increasing the performance of technology functions for the SINAMICS DCM DC converter. As a result of the additional standard CUD that is inserted in the right-hand slot of the electronics tray, users have additional computational performance at their fingertips in order to fulfill even the highest demands when it comes to closed-loop control performance. Connection The connections of the Standard CUD installed at the right are routed to a TMC terminal module. This terminal module has the designation -X72 and is suitable as customer connection. See the description of the terminal module TMC. Commissioning Refer to the operating instructions for the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter as well as the circuit diagram with connection suggestion in the operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter, electrical installation. Parameter assignment See the List Manual SINAMICS DCM. Diagnostics See the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter operating instructions SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 183 Options 11.1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& )UDPHVL]HV%&&& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-2 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 184 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter 11.1.3 G11, Advanced CUD right Category SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Function Advanced CUD in the right-hand slot (precondition, option G00). With option G11, users can address the highest demands regarding the closed-loop control performance and use the wide range of interfaces. With this option, in addition to the Advanced CUD located in the lefthand slot, an additional Advanced CUD can be installed in the right-hand slot. This therefore doubles the number of interfaces of the SINAMICS DCM DC converter. Connection The connections of the Advanced CUD installed at the right are routed to a TMC terminal module. This terminal module has the designation -X72 and is suitable as customer connection. See the description of the terminal module TMC. Parameter assignment See the List Manual SINAMICS DCM. Diagnostics See the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter operating instructions SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 185 Options 11.1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& )UDPHVL]HV%&&& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-3 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 186 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter 11.1.4 G20, Communication Board CBE20 left Category SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Function CBE20 PROFINET left (precondition, option G00). The CBE20 Communication Board can be used to connect to a PROFINET IO network via the Advanced CUD. The SINAMICS DC MASTER then assumes the function of a PROFINET IO device in the sense of PROFINET and offers the following functions: PROFINET IO device 100 Mbit/s full duplex Supports real-time classes of PROFINET IO: RT (Real-Time) Connection to control systems as PROFINET IO devices in accordance with PROFIdrive, Specification V4.1. In addition to PROFIBUS (standard), PROFINET can also be used for engineering with the STARTER commissioning tool. Integrated 4-port switch with four RJ45 sockets based on the PROFINET ASIC ERTEC400. The optimum topology (line, star, tree) can therefore be configured without additional external switches. The SINAMICS Link function can be used in conjunction with option S01 or S02 (memory card). The CBE20 is inserted in the option slot of the Advanced CUD, which is inserted in the lefthand slot. Connection Information on PROFINET cables and connectors can be found in the following catalog: Industrial Communication, Catalog IK PI, 2009 edition, Commissioning See the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter operating instructions Parameter assignment See the List Manual SINAMICS DCM. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 187 Options 11.1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H&& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRUVWUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-4 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 188 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-5 Cable routing (2) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 189 Options 11.1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter 11.1.5 G21, Communication Board CBE20 right Category SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Function CBE20 PROFINET right (possible with option G11). With option G21, an Advanced CUD, which is inserted in the right-hand slot, can be expanded with a CBE20. More detailed information on the functionality, selection and ordering data of the CBE20 is provided under option G20. Connection Information on PROFINET cables and connectors can be found in the following catalog: Industrial Communication, Catalog IK PI, 2009 edition, Commissioning See the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter operating instructions Parameter assignment See the List Manual SINAMICS DCM. Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 190 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H&& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRUVWUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-6 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 191 Options 11.1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-7 Cable routing (2) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 192 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter 11.1.6 L10, without field power unit Category SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Function The SINAMICS DCM DC converter is supplied without field power unit. The entire field circuit is also omitted. This option cannot be ordered for units with rated DC currents from 15 to 30 A. Connection The entire field circuit is omitted, and therefore also the output terminals for the motor field connection at terminal strip -X3. 11.1.7 L11, 2Q field power unit Category SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Function For applications that demand high speed field current changes, by specifying option L11, the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter can be equipped with a two-quadrant field with active current reduction. Further, this field power unit has an integrated field overvoltage protection function. This option cannot be ordered for units with rated DC currents from 15 A to 30 A. Connection The connection is made at the standard terminals for the field output, see the operating instructions SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter, Connecting the motor and power cables. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 193 Options 11.1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter 11.1.8 L21, unit fan for single-phase connection Category SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Function Converter units from 400 A up to and including 1200 A rated DC current can, using this option, be equipped with a fan for connection to a single-phase supply. This is supplied from the internally generated 230 V AC control voltage, and from a circuit perspective, is treated in exactly the same way as a standard fan. Cabinet fans, which are installed in the converter cabinet in order to implement higher degrees of protection, are not affected by the option. The fans are protected using an integrated overtemperature protection function. Connection Is connected up in the manufacturer's factory. 11.1.9 L85, 85 A field power unit Category SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Function All components in the field circuit and the field power unit in the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter are dimensioned for a rated current of 85 A (possible for units with a rated DC current, armature 1500 A; also in conjunction with option L11 (2Q field power unit)). With option L85, the maximum connection cross-section of the auxiliary supply is increased up to 50 mm2 and for the DC output to the field, up to 35 mm2. The maximum permissible protection (fusing) on the customer side is 125 A. Connection The connection is made to the terminal strip for the field output -X3.1 and -X3.2. For details, refer to operating instructions SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter, Connecting the motor and power cables. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 194 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.1 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter 11.1.10 M10, nickel-plated copper busbars Category SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Function The busbars and CU-Flex are nickel-plated copper busbars; this means that in aggressive atmospheres, an increased degree of availability can be achieved. Cabinets with rated currents of 1500, 1600, 1900, 2000 and 2200 A have aluminum busbars as standard. Nickelplated copper busbars can also be supplied by specifying option M10. 11.1.11 S01, memory card left Category SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Function With Option S01, users receive a memory card for one Standard CUD or one Advanced CUD, which is inserted in the left-hand slot. This memory card offers the following options: Additional languages can be downloaded to the Advanced Operator Panel AOP30. When using two CUDs, option S01 and option S02 must be ordered. Performing an offline long-time trace. Download the DCC block library into the drive. Update the firmware. The SINAMICS Link function requires that the memory card is always inserted. Commissioning The memory card is supplied in the attached package, and is inserted in the memory card slot of the CUD module during commissioning. See the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter operating instructions SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 195 Options 11.2 Other voltages, frequencies 11.1.12 S02, memory card right Category SINAMICS DCM DC Converter Function With Option S02, users receive a memory card for one Standard CUD or one Advanced CUD, which is inserted in the righthand slot. This option is only possible, if one of the options G10 or G11 is ordered for installing a CUD in the right-hand slot. Commissioning The memory card is supplied in the attached package, and is inserted in the memory card slot of the CUD module during commissioning. See the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter operating instructions 11.2 Other voltages, frequencies 11.2.1 L04 armature supply with extra-low voltage 10 to 50 V Category Other voltages, frequencies Function With option L04, the armature circuit of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter is changed over for operation with 10 to 50 V AC. This is frequently required for electrochemical applications, when controlling solenoids, when using the converter to supply the fields of special motors or Ward-Leonard converters (MG sets). Note This option can only be selected for units with rated supply voltages of up to 575 V. The commutating reactor is omitted (option L22), and on the plant or system side, a converter transformer is required for the armature circuit. In this case, it is not possible to order option L00 (radio interference suppression filter). SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 196 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.2 Other voltages, frequencies 11.2.2 L05, electronics power supply for connection to 24 V DC Category Other voltages, frequencies Function The power interface in the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter is supplied with the electronics power supply for connection to 24 V DC. In addition to this option, one of the options L06, L07 or L09 must be selected to define the type of 24 V DC supply. The current demand is a maximum of 5 A. 11.2.3 L06, 24 V DC supply with SITOP Category Other voltages, frequencies Function A SITOP power supply unit is installed in the cabinet to generate 24 V DC. The SITOP power supply unit is supplied from the cabinet's internal control voltage 1-ph. 230 V AC. The power supply unit is used to supply the internal 24 V DC loads (e.g. option L05, G60, G62, K50, Y52 to Y56). 11.2.4 L07, 24 V DC power supply from an external supply Category Other voltages, frequencies Function The 24 V DC must be provided on the plant or system side. Terminals are provided for the connection. This voltage is used to supply the internal 24 V DC loads (e.g. option L05, G60, G62, K50, Y52 to Y56). SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 197 Options 11.2 Other voltages, frequencies Connection Table 11- 1 Terminal strip -X2 connection for 24 V power supply Terminal Designation Technical data 51 L+ 52 L- 24 V DC power supply PELV required PE PE Grounding of the 24 V circuit. When externally grounding the 24 V circuit, the jumper to L- may be opened. Terminal type: ST 4 QUATTRO External protection with a maximum of 13 A is required. The cable must be marked with its cable number so that it cannot be lost, the cable number and the conductor numbers/conductor colors must be documented in the terminal diagram. Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& )UDPHVL]HV%&&& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-8 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 198 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.2 Other voltages, frequencies 11.2.5 L09, 24 V DC power supply using SITOP UPS Category Other voltages, frequencies Function A SITOP power supply unit to generate 24 V DC and the SITOP UPS500S basic module for the uninterruptible power supply of max.15 A load current 3 s are installed in the cabinet. The power supply unit is supplied from the cabinet's internal control voltage 1-ph. 230 V AC. The power supply unit is used to supply the internal 24 V DC loads (e.g. option L05, G60, G62, K50, Y52 to Y56). Connection Is connected up in the manufacturer's factory. Diagnostics Monitoring and alarm messages are available at the SITOP UPS500S device. See operating instructions for the SITOP UPS500S. PELV is required. Cable insulation for routing in the cable duct: U0 300 V. 11.2.6 V60, rated line frequency 60 Hz Category Other voltages, frequencies Function This option must be specified, if the line frequency of the armature and auxiliary circuits is 60 Hz instead of the standard 50 Hz. The commutating reactors for the armature circuit and the field circuit as well as the motor protection circuit breaker of the unit fan (for units with 400 A rated DC current) are then appropriately adapted. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 199 Options 11.2 Other voltages, frequencies 11.2.7 Y02, adaptation transformer for the field supply Category Other voltages, frequencies Function This option can be selected if the 3-phase AC auxiliary supply deviates from 400 V 50 Hz or 460 V 60 Hz or if the field voltage is to be adapted to the actual motor field voltage. The required secondary voltage of the adaptation transformer and the rated field current must be specified in plain text. The adaptation transformer is, up to a primary voltage of 3 AC 500 V, implemented as autotransformer. For certain option combinations, this option can result in increased cabinet dimensions. Connection Is connected up in the manufacturer's factory. Commissioning Checking the setting of the transformer circuit breaker Diagnostics The signal contact of the assigned transformer circuit breaker is included in the group fault signal "circuit breaker tripped" in the signaling circuit. This group fault signal is provided as an isolated contact at terminal strip -X2.1 .2. For details refer to the operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter, Electrical installation/other connections. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 200 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.2 Other voltages, frequencies 11.2.8 Y03, 3AC auxiliary voltage not available Category Other voltages, frequencies Function This option should be selected if a 3-phase auxiliary voltage is not available. In this case, the auxiliary power supply is taken from inside the cabinet in front of the main armature switch of the armature circuit. The rated input voltage available in the customer's system should be specified as part of the inquiry or when ordering the system. If the rated input voltage is neither 3-ph. 400 V AC 50 Hz nor 3-ph. 460 V AC 60 Hz, then option Y04 must be additionally selected. Note Option L22 (no armature commutating reactor) cannot be selected at the same time as this option! The rated input voltage must be specified. Note Options Y03 and Y04 are only available for systems with a rated input voltage of 690 V. Connection The terminal strip -X1 for the auxiliary power supply is omitted. Diagnostics The signal contacts of the assigned fuse monitoring are included in the group fault signal "circuit breaker tripped" in the signaling circuit. This group fault signal is provided as an isolated contact at terminal strip -X2.1 .2. For details refer to the operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter, Electrical installation/other connections. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 201 Options 11.2 Other voltages, frequencies 11.2.9 Y04, 3 AC auxiliary voltage not the same as the standard voltage Category Other voltages, frequencies Function As standard, the cabinet is supplied with an auxiliary voltage of 3-ph 400 V AC, 50 Hz, with clockwise rotating field, TN or TT line supply and grounded transformer neutral point. If option V60, line frequency 60 Hz, is selected, the auxiliary voltage must be 3-ph 460 V AC. Option Y04 should be selected if the 3-AC auxiliary voltage deviates from these values. The required voltage must be specified in plain text. The auxiliary voltage may not exceed 690 V. The auxiliary power supply must be protected on the line-side against short-circuit and overload. Data for the fuses for the auxiliary power supply (supplies) should be taken from the type and order-specific circuit diagram. Note Depending on the particular version, it may be necessary to additionally select options Y01 and/or Y02. Connection Is connected up in the manufacturer's factory. Commissioning Checking the setting of the transformer circuit breaker Diagnostics The signal contact of the assigned transformer circuit breaker is included in the group fault signal "circuit breaker tripped" in the signaling circuit. This group fault signal is provided as an isolated contact at terminal strip -X2.1 .2. For details refer to the operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter, Electrical installation/other connections. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 202 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.3 OFF functions 11.3 OFF functions 11.3.1 B30, intervention option for the infeed circuit breaker interlocking Category OFF functions Available only for systems with rated armature currents >850 A. Function An external intervention option (terminals, to integrate an external NC contact) is provided so that the infeed circuit breaker or main contactor can be externally opened. For instance, this can be a leading auxiliary switch of a circuit breaker on the line side, so that an overvoltage occurring when switching off the transformer on the primary side cannot be propagated to the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter. An EMERGENCY STOP must be simultaneously issued; terminals are provided as standard for this function. An internally generated 230 V AC control voltage is available at the terminals; an isolated contact should be externally connected. Connection Table 11- 2 Terminal strip -X2 - connection for circuit breaker interlocking Terminal Designation Technical data 5 L1 230V 6 - NC contact required, contact must be open in order that the infeed circuit breaker is opened. Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm The cable must be marked with its cable number so that it cannot be lost, the cable number and the conductor numbers/conductor colors must be documented in the terminal diagram. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 203 Options 11.3 OFF functions Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& )UDPHVL]HV%&&& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 204 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.3 OFF functions 11.3.2 L57, EMERGENCY OFF Category 0 for uncontrolled stopping in accordance with EN 60204-1 Category OFF functions Function This function allows the energy feed for the converter to be interrupted (armature circuit and field circuit) via the main contactor or via the circuit breaker, bypassing the microprocessor controller of the drive using a safety relay. The motor current is interrupted and the motor coasts down. It must be ensured that this type of switch off does not represent any danger. 3TK2827 and 3TK2830 safety relays are used with a 24 V DC supply voltage. When pressing the EMERGENCY OFF button, the E-STOP function (terminals XS1-105, 106) is triggered at the drive. The armature current is reduced to zero and the firing pulses are inhibited. At the same time, the armature contactor and the field contactor are directly opened via the 3TK2830 expansion device. The time delay that can be adjusted at the 3TK2827 is not active. Connection Table 11- 3 Terminal block -X2 - additional connections for EMERGENCY OFF Terminal Designation Technical data 21 External reset 24 V DC 22 External reset External reset (NO contact) 23 Button, channel 1 24 V DC 24 Button, channel 1 EMERGENCY OFF button, two channels 25 Button, channel 2 26 Button, channel 2 Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm WARNING No safety isolation The circuits available at terminal strip -X2, terminal numbers 21 to 26, do not comply with safety isolation according to the requirements for protection against electric shock according to EN 61800-5-1. Commissioning Commissioning is not required SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 205 Options 11.3 OFF functions Parameter assignment Parameterization not required Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& )UDPHVL]HV%&&& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-9 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 206 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.3 OFF functions 11.3.3 L59, EMERGENCY STOP Category 1 for controlled stopping in accordance with EN 60204-1 Category OFF functions Function This function allows the drive to be stopped using the function quick stop (OFF3) along a deceleration ramp to be parameterized by the user. The energy feed to the converter is then interrupted (armature circuit and field circuit) via the main contactor or via the circuit-breaker, bypassing the microprocessor controller of the drive using a safety relay. It must be ensured that this type of switch off does not represent any danger. 3TK2827 and 3TK2830 safety relays are used with a 24 V DC supply voltage. When the EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed, the quick stop function is initiated at the drive (OFF3 via terminal X71-15 (DI/DO 4)). As a consequence, the speed is reduced corresponding to the down ramp defined using parameters p50296, p50297 and p50298. The time delay to be set at safety relay 3TK2827 to interrupt the energy feed must be equal to or greater than this down ramp. After the time delay has expired, the E-STOP function is initiated at the drive (terminals XS1-105, -106). At the same time, the armature contactor and the field contactor are directly opened via the 3TK2830 expansion device. Connection Table 11- 4 Terminal block -X2 - additional connections for EMERGENCY STOP Terminal Designation Technical data 21 External reset 24 V DC 22 External reset External reset (NO contact) 23 Button, channel 1 24 V DC 24 Button, channel 1 EMERGENCY OFF button, two channels 25 Button, channel 2 26 Button, channel 2 Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm WARNING No safety isolation The circuits available at terminal strip -X2, terminal numbers 21 to 26, do not comply with safety isolation according to the requirements for protection against electric shock according to EN 61800-5-1. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 207 Options 11.3 OFF functions Commissioning See also paragraph "Function" Set the OFF3 ramp-down times (p50296, p50297, p50298) Set the safety relay delay time (factory setting = 30 s) Check the functionality in all of the used command data sets (CDS) and drive data sets (DDS) Document all of the settings Parameter assignment Regardless of the combination of the selected options, when selecting option L59 for the OFF3 function (quick stop), binary input DI/DO 4 (terminal X71.15) on the customer terminal strip (TMC) of the drive cabinet is always used. Parameter setting: p50789.0 = 0 p00849.0 = r53010.8 p00849.1 = r53010.8 p50296.0 = x This time is determined and set when commissioning the system p50296.1 = x Same as index 0 p50296.2 = x Same as index 0 p50296.3 = x Same as index 0 p50297.0 = 0 Corresponds to the factory setting p50297.1 = 0 Same as index 0 p50297.2 = 0 Same as index 0 p50297.3 = 0 Same as index 0 p50298.0 = 0 Corresponds to the factory setting p50298.1 = 0 Same as index 0 p50298.2 = 0 Same as index 0 p50298.3 = 0 Same as index 0 p50370.0 = 0.5 Corresponds to the factory setting p50370.1 = 0.5 Same as index 0 p50370.2 = 0.5 Same as index 0 p50370.3 = 0.5 Same as index 0 p50371.0 = 0.5 Corresponds to the factory setting p50371.1 = 0.5 Same as index 0 p50371.2 = 0.5 Same as index 0 p50371.3 = 0.5 Same as index 0 p50088 = x This time is determined and set when commissioning the system SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 208 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.3 OFF functions p50330.0 = 0 Corresponds to the factory setting p50330.1 = 0 Same as index 0 p50330.2 = 0 Same as index 0 p50330.3 = 0 Same as index 0 Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& )UDPHVL]HV%&&& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-10 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 209 Options 11.4 Display instruments 11.4 Display instruments 11.4.1 B60, display instrument "speed" Category Display instruments Function Analog display instrument, door mounting, black front frame, 96 x 96 mm, scale 0 to 125 % with center zero point. The measured value is provided via an analog output of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter. Note A maximum of six display instruments can be ordered for various display values. From a total of three display instruments (B60, B61, B62, B64), option G60 must also be ordered. Connection Is connected up in the manufacturer's factory. Commissioning The analog output actually used depends on the combination of the selected options, and must be taken from the circuit diagram on a project for project basis. According to the project-specific solution, the parameter assignment should be defined using the operating instructions for the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter and the List Manual, and should be parameterized and tested during the commissioning phase. Parameter assignment Interconnect connector r52167 to the analog output. The analog output intended for this function must be parameterized on a project-for-project basis. Normalization: 10 V at the analog output corresponds to 125 % of r52167 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 210 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.4 Display instruments 11.4.2 B61, display instrument "armature voltage" Category Display instruments Function Analog display instrument, door mounted, black front frame, 96 x 96 mm, scale maximum DC voltage that can be reached (1.35 x line voltage) with center zero point. The measured value is provided via an analog output of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter. Note A maximum of six display instruments can be ordered for various display values. From a total of three display instruments (B60, B61, B62, B64), option G60 must also be ordered. Connection Is connected up in the manufacturer's factory. Commissioning The analog output actually used depends on the combination of the selected options, and must be taken from the circuit diagram on a project for project basis. According to the project-specific solution, the parameter assignment should be defined using the operating instructions for the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter and the List Manual, and should be parameterized and tested during the commissioning phase. Parameter assignment Interconnect connector r52292 to the analog output. Scaling of p52292: 100 % corresponds to p50078[0] x 3 x 2 / The scaling must be performed corresponding to the end of scale value of the measuring instrument. The analog output intended for this function must be parameterized on a project-for-project basis. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 211 Options 11.4 Display instruments 11.4.3 B62, display instrument "armature current" Category Display instruments Function Analog display instrument, door mounting, black front frame, 96 x 96 mm, scale 0 to 200 % for two-quadrant units and 200 % with center zero point for four-quadrant units. The measured value is provided via an analog output of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter. Note A maximum of six display instruments can be ordered for various display values. From a total of three display instruments (B60, B61, B62, B64), option G60 must also be ordered. Connection Is connected up in the manufacturer's factory. Commissioning The analog output actually used depends on the combination of the selected options, and must be taken from the circuit diagram on a project for project basis. According to the project-specific solution, the parameter assignment should be defined using the operating instructions for the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter and the List Manual, and should be parameterized and tested during the commissioning phase. Parameter assignment Interconnect connector r52109 to the analog output. Scaling of p52109: 100 % corresponds to p50072[1] The scaling must be performed corresponding to the end of scale value of the measuring instrument. The analog output intended for this function must be parameterized on a project-for-project basis. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 212 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.4 Display instruments 11.4.4 B63, display instrument, "line voltage excitation" Category Display instruments Function Analog display instrument, door mounting, black front frame, 96 x 96 mm, scale 0 up to the excitation input voltage, as standard 500 V. The measured value is taken at the excitation circuit input in the front of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter. Connection Is connected up in the manufacturer's factory. 11.4.5 B64, display instrument "excitation current" Category Display instruments Function Analog display instrument, door mounting, black front frame, 96 x 96 mm, scale 0 to approx. 110 % rated excitation current. The measured value is provided via an analog output of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter. Note A maximum of six display instruments can be ordered for various display values. From a total of three display instruments (B60, B61, B62, B64), option G60 must also be ordered. Connection Is connected up in the manufacturer's factory. Commissioning The analog output actually used depends on the combination of the selected options, and must be taken from the circuit diagram on a project for project basis. According to the project-specific solution, the parameter assignment should be defined using the operating instructions for the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter and the List Manual, and should be parameterized and tested during the commissioning phase. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 213 Options 11.4 Display instruments Parameter assignment Interconnect connector r52265 to the analog output. Scaling of p52265: 100 % corresponds to p50073[1] The scaling must be performed corresponding to the end of scale value of the measuring instrument. The analog output intended for this function must be parameterized on a project-for-project basis. 11.4.6 B65, display instrument, "line voltage armature circuit" Category Display instruments Function Analog display instrument, door mounting, black front frame, 96 x 96 mm, scale 0 to approx. 110 %, armature supply voltage. The measured value is taken from the armature supply voltage in the cabinet before the main switch using a voltmeter changeover switch (L1-L2/L2L3/L1-L3). Connection Is connected up in the manufacturer's factory. 11.4.7 B66, display instrument "Line current armature circuit" Category Display instruments Function Analog display instrument, door mounting, black front frame, 96 x 96 mm, scale 0 to 2 x the rated armature input current. The line current in the armature circuit is measured using a current transformer located in the converter cabinet on the line side. The measured value is routed to a display instrument. Connection Is connected up in the manufacturer's factory. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 214 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.4 Display instruments 11.4.8 P11, display instrument for line values with PROFIBUS connection (installed in the cabinet door) Category Display instruments Function All of the relevant line parameters are displayed on the"SENTRON PAC3200", multi-function measuring device installed in the cabinet door of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet. In addition to these measured values, additional plant/system values are calculated from the measured values (e.g. power, power factor). The multi-function measuring device also has an extension module with PROFIBUS interface with a maximum data transfer rate of 12 Mbit/s. The device can measure the following as standard: Actual currents per phase and actual currents of the neutral conductor Average currents and maximum currents over programmable time intervals from 1 to 60 min. Phase voltages and phase-to-phase voltages Frequency (Hz) Four-quadrant measurement of the actual, average, and maximum active power (+/-), reactive power (+/-) and apparent power (+/-) per phase and in total over programmable time intervals from 1 to 60 min. Display of active energy in kWh. Power factor (PF) per phase and in total with the specifications "L" for inductive and "C" for capacitive Note To acquire the line currents, current transformers are required, to acquire the line voltages, depending on the voltage magnitude, potential transformers are required in the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet. If current transformers and potential transformers are required, then they are part of the scope of supply. The multi-function measuring device "SENTRON PAC3200" is wired according to connection type 3P3W in the factory. It is not permissible that the current transformers are operated without any load. Note Detailed and comprehensive instructions and information regarding the "SENTRON PAC3200" multi-function measuring device can be found in the accompanying operating instructions, This operating manual is included as additional documentation on the customer DVD. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 215 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits Connection Is connected up in the manufacturer's factory. 11.5 Supplementary circuits 11.5.1 C51, 24 V coil voltage of the coupling relay at the binary inputs Category Supplementary circuits Function The four coupling relays at the binary inputs of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter: which are as standard equipped with a 230 V AC coil, are supplied with 24 V DC coil. Connection Table 11- 5 Terminals -XK - connection for input coupling relay Terminal Designation Technical data -K11:A1 - Free for customers -K11:A2 - 24 V DC -K12:A1 - ON / STOP -K12:A2 - 24 V DC -K13:A1 - Operation enable -K13:A2 - 24 V DC -K14:A1 - Free for customers -K14:A2 - 24 V DC Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 216 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]HV%&&& )UDPHVL]H'& )UDPHVL]HV(&)& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-11 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 217 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits 11.5.2 K85, field reversal Category Supplementary circuits Function Changes over the field circuit for the DC motor for braking and direction of rotation reversal for two-quadrant units with rated DC currents of 400 A. The following additional data is required in plain text: 1. Rated motor field current 2. Rated motor field voltage 3. Energy content or inductance of the field winding 4. Maximum switching frequency per hour Connection The connection is made at the standard terminals for the field output. For details refer to the operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter, Connecting the motor and power cables. Commissioning It should be checked as to whether the changeover can be made without the reversing contactors arcing excessively. Otherwise, the wait time for field decay p50092[0] should be extended. Parameter assignment Contrary to the operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, the field contactors should be controlled via digital outputs 1 and 2 (output 0 is used for the fan control). Set the value (63) r53195.0 at p50772. Set the value (63) r53195.1 at p50773. At p50580, p50581, p50092[0]...[3], set suitable values according to the function diagram 6920- in the List Manual. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 218 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits 11.5.3 L00, radio interference suppression filter Category Supplementary circuits Function Radio interference suppression filters are used on the line side, both for the armature as well as the auxiliary circuits. With radio interference suppression filter, the cabinets comply with standard EN 61800-3 Category C2. For rated DC currents of 400 A and higher, an additional cabinet is necessary. Note This option is intended for operation on grounded line supplies. Options L00 and L22 (no three-phase commutating reactor) cannot be combined. For systems with the following rated DC currents, the short-circuit current strength differs from the data provided in Chapter Technical specifications (Page 134): Table 11- 6 Short-circuit current strength Rated DC current Short-circuit strength with option L00 15 A to 125 A 43 kA 210 A to 280 A 25 kA Note For the specified line-side fusing, a higher line short-circuit current is permissible depending on the fuse used. Connection The connection point of the armature circuit supply depends on the size of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, and is realized either at terminal strip -X0 or directly at the radio interference suppression filter. See Chapter Technical specifications (Page 134). The auxiliary power supply is always connected at terminal strip -X1. Data on the terminal types (connection capacity, stripped length, tightening torque) see Appendix A.1. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 219 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits 11.5.4 L22, elimination of the three-phase commutating reactor Category Supplementary circuits Function A three-phase commutating reactor is not mounted in the drive cabinet, it is also not supplied. On the plant/system side, by using an appropriately large inductance, it must be ensured that disturbances fed into the line supply as a result of voltage peaks during converter commutation are minimized. This is generally guaranteed if the converter has its own converter transformer with an adequate short-circuit voltage (6 to 10%). Note This option cannot be combined with option Y03 (no auxiliary power supply available). This option cannot be combined with option L00 (radio interference suppression filters). 11.5.5 L50, cabinet lighting and service socket outlet Category Supplementary circuits Function The panel has its own universal lamp; the control cabinet also has a service socket outlet. When the cabinet door is opened, a motion sensor automatically switches on the light. The power supply (1 AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz) must be available externally from a grounded line supply and fused/protected in the low-voltage distribution on the plant side with maximum 16 A. A combined miniature circuit breaker/residual current-operated circuit breaker 13 A/30 mA is installed in the cabinet. DANGER When the supply voltage for the cabinet lighting is connected, dangerous voltages are present in the cabinet unit even when the main switch is open. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 220 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits Connection Table 11- 7 Terminal strip -X4 - connection for cabinet lighting with service socket Terminal Designation Technical data Insulation requirements 1 L1 230 V AC power supply U0 300 V 2 N PE PE PE protective conductor Terminal type: ST 2.5 QUATTRO, see Appendix A.1 Connectable conductor cross-sections for screw terminals (Page 293) The cable must be marked with its cable number so that it cannot be lost, the cable number and the conductor numbers/conductor colors must be documented in the terminal diagram. Note When option L55 is simultaneously selected (cabinet anti-condensation heating) and/or A30...A34 (motor anti-condensation heating), these options can be supplied from one location. Terminals -X4:1, -X4:3 and -X4:5, as well as the terminals -X4:2, -X4:4 and -X4:6 must then be connected with wire jumpers. Commissioning Checking the residual-current circuit breaker. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 221 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H&& )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ 6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQDQGVWUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQV 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-12 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 222 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits 11.5.6 L55, cabinet anti-condensation heating Category Supplementary circuits Function For high air humidity (e.g. in tropical countries) and/or low ambient temperatures, it is recommended that the drive cabinets are equipped with anti-condensation heating to guarantee reliable operation (e.g. to prevent moisture condensation). A heating element with 150 W is installed in each cabinet panel. A thermostat is used to control the temperature. An external power supply is required (1 AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz) and must be protected with maximum 16 A. If the temperature inside the cabinet is lower than the value that is set at the temperature controller D5-S23, then the cabinet heating is switched on. If the temperature inside the cabinet is higher than the value that is set at the temperature controller D5-S23, then the cabinet heating is switched off. DANGER When the supply voltage for the cabinet anti-condensation heating is connected, dangerous voltages are present in the cabinet unit, even when the main switch is open. Connection Table 11- 8 Terminal strip -X4 - connection for the cabinet anti-condensation heating Terminal Designation Technical data Insulation requirements 3 L1 230 V AC power supply U0 300 V 4 N PE PE PE protective conductor Terminal type: ST 2.5 QUATTRO, see Appendix A.1 Connectable conductor cross-sections for screw terminals (Page 293) The cable must be marked with its cable number so that it cannot be lost, the cable number and the conductor numbers/conductor colors must be documented in the terminal diagram. Note When option L50 is simultaneously selected (cabinet lighting) and/or A30...A34 (motor anticondensation heating), these options can be supplied from one location. Terminals -X4:1, X4:3 and -X4:5, as well as the terminals -X4:2, -X4:4 and -X4:6 must then be connected with wire jumpers. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 223 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits Commissioning The temperature controller must be set when commissioning the system, so that under the prevailing ambient conditions, condensation inside the cabinet is, as far as possible, prevented. Parameter assignment The setting when delivered is 10 C. The switching difference is approx. 1 C. Diagnostics The signaling contact of miniature circuit breaker =D5-F23 is included in the group fault signal, circuit breaker tripped. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 224 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H&& )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ 6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQDQGVWUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQV 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-13 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 225 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits 11.5.7 V70, input isolating amplifier input: 0 mA to 20 mA Category Function Supplementary circuits To connect an external analog setpoint, a DC isolating amplifier with galvanic isolation and three-way separation is used. Input: 0 mA to 20 mA Output: 0 V to 10 V, which is wired to terminals -X71:25 :26 Power supply: 230 V AC When ordering, additional plain text is required in the circuit manual specifying the input quantity to be transferred. Note A universal isolating amplifier is used. When required, the preset (default) input/output configuration can be changed. A readjustment is required in this case. The operating instructions for the isolating amplifier are included in the scope of delivery. Note If more than one option V70 to V74 is required, then when ordering, this should be specified using a multiple selection. In this case, the analog inputs that are to be used can be seen from the order-specific circuit diagram. Connection The customer connection is established directly at the isolation amplifier. The terminals are shown in the project-specific circuit diagram and in the project-specific terminal diagram. The shield of the signal cable should be directly connected where it enters the cabinet at the shield connection rail provided, through the largest possible surface area. The shield must be routed to the isolating amplifier without any interruption at all. The cable must be marked with its cable number so that it cannot be lost, the cable number and the conductor numbers/conductor colors must be documented in the terminal diagram. Requirements relating to the insulation of the conductors and/or cables on the plant side: U0 300 V Commissioning The input and output configuration defined according to the option is preset as default. The setting of the DIP switches S1, S2 and S3 at the isolating amplifier should be checked using the operating instructions of the isolating amplifier. Parameter assignment The scaling as well as the target interconnection of the analog input variables should be realized by appropriately assigning parameters in the converter unit. See the operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, List Manual of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter, Signal connections and project-specific circuit diagram. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 226 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& )UDPHVL]HV%&&& 6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQDQGVWUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQV 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-14 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 227 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits 11.5.8 V71, input isolating amplifier input: 4 mA to 20 mA Category Supplementary circuits Function To connect an external analog setpoint, a DC isolating amplifier with galvanic isolation and three-way separation is used. Input: 4 mA to 20 mA Output: 0 V to 10 V, which is wired to terminals -X71:25 :26 Power supply: 230 V AC Other version, see option V70. Connection See option V70 Commissioning See option V70 Parameter assignment See option V70 Cable routing See option V70 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 228 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits 11.5.9 V72, input isolating amplifiers input: 0 V to +10 V Category Supplementary circuits Function To connect an external analog setpoint, a DC isolating amplifier with galvanic isolation and three-way separation is used. Input: 0 V to +10 V Output: 0 V to 10 V, which is wired to terminals -X71:25 :26 Power supply: 230 V AC Other version, see option V70. Connection See option V70 Commissioning See option V70 Parameter assignment See option V70 Cable routing See option V70 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 229 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits 11.5.10 V73, input isolating amplifier input: -20 mA to +20 mA Category Supplementary circuits Function To connect an external analog setpoint, a DC isolating amplifier with galvanic isolation and three-way separation is used. Input: -20 mA to +20 mA Output: 0 V to 10 V, which is wired to terminals -X71:25 :26 Power supply: 230 V AC Other version, see option V70. Connection See option V70 Commissioning See option V70 Parameter assignment See option V70 Cable routing See option V70 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 230 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits 11.5.11 V74, input isolating amplifier input: -10 V to +10 V Category Supplementary circuits Function To connect an external analog setpoint, a DC isolating amplifier with galvanic isolation and three-way separation is used. Input: -10 V to +10 V Output: 0 V to 10 V, which is wired to terminals -X71:25 :26 Power supply: 230 V AC Other version, see option V70. Connection See option V70 Commissioning See option V70 Parameter assignment See option V70 Cable routing See option V70 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 231 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits 11.5.12 Y51, mechanical motor brake Category Supplementary circuits Function Connection data: 1 AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz. Brake control is realized via SINAMICS DCM Cabinet. From the 1-ph. 230 V AC control voltage generated in the cabinet, a feeder to supply a magnetic holding brake is provided via a miniature circuit breaker. The feeder is controlled via a binary output of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter and a contactor; the binary output must be "high" to provide power to the brake feeder (NC contact) and therefore to release the brake. With this option, the technical data (holding current) of the motor holding brake must be specified in plain text. Motorized holding brakes, other control versions or different rated voltages must be specified as a special option X30. Connection Table 11- 9 Terminal strip -X2 - connection for motor holding brake Terminal Designation Technical data 61 - 62 - Feeder for the motor holding brake, controlled 1-ph. 230 V AC PE - Protective conductor Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm Parameter assignment p50080 is used to set whether the brake is effective as holding brake (p50080 = 1) or operational brake (p50080 = 2). For additional parameters, see function diagram -2750- in the List Manual. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 232 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& )UDPHVL]HV%&&& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-15 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 233 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits 11.5.13 Y52, output isolating amplifier output: 0 mA to 20 mA Category Supplementary circuits Function A DC isolating amplifier with galvanic isolation and three-way separation is used to transfer analog output signals with electrical isolation. The isolating amplifier is wired to one of the analog outputs at CU1/-X177:49/50 or CU1/X177:51/52. The isolating amplifiers have three-way separation and are supplied with 230 V AC from inside the cabinet. Display instruments and isolating amplifiers for the output of the same signal, e.g. "armature current", are connected to the same analog output. For this reason, the signal to be output (e.g. "armature current", "speed", etc. ) must always be specified. Note A universal isolating amplifier is used. When required, the preset (default) input/output configuration can be changed. A readjustment is required in this case. Note Precisely two analog outputs are available for each CUD. This must be observed if more than two isolating amplifiers are connected, or additional display instrument options B60 to B62 or B64 are selected, as the latter are also supplied via analog outputs. If required, a second CUD (option G10 or G11) and/or one or several TM31 Terminal Modules must then be additionally installed. In this case, the analog outputs that are to be used can be seen from the order-specific circuit diagram. Connection The customer connection is directly established at isolating amplifier XT-T2 (1) at terminals 7 and 9. Parameter assignment Isolating amplifiers are preset, no parameterization is required. Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 234 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& )UDPHVL]HV%&&& 6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQDQGVWUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQV 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-16 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 235 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits 11.5.14 Y53, output isolating amplifier output: 4 mA to 20 mA Category Supplementary circuits Function Version, see option Y52 Connection The customer connection is directly established at isolating amplifier XT-T2 (1) at terminals 7 and 9. Parameter assignment Isolating amplifiers are preset, no parameterization is required. Cable routing See option Y52 11.5.15 Y54, output isolating amplifier output: 0 V to 10 V Category Supplementary circuits Function Version, see option Y52 Connection The customer connection is directly established at isolating amplifier XT-T2 (1) at terminals 8 and 9. Parameter assignment Isolating amplifiers are preset, no parameterization is required. Cable routing See option Y52 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 236 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits 11.5.16 Y55, output isolating amplifier output: -20 mA to +20 mA Category Supplementary circuits Function Version, see option Y52 Connection The customer connection is directly established at isolating amplifier XT-T2 (1) at terminals 3.1 and 3.2. Parameter assignment Isolating amplifiers are preset, no parameterization is required. Cable routing See option Y52 11.5.17 Y56, output isolating amplifier output: -10 V to 10 V Category Supplementary circuits Function Version, see option Y52 Connection The customer connection is directly established at isolating amplifier XT-T2 (1) at terminals 8 and 9. Parameter assignment Isolating amplifiers are preset, no parameterization is required. Cable routing See option Y52 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 237 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits 11.5.18 Y60, coupling relay for binary output Category Supplementary circuits Function A binary output of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter is provided for customers via an output coupling relay and its isolated changeover contact. The relay is in the form of a terminal relay, so that customers can directly connect their cables at these -XK terminals. The relay function can be freely selected. When ordering, the use must also be specified in plain text so that it can be included in the circuit manual (e.g.: "Drive operational"). If several output isolating amplifiers are required, then the option should be specified several times. Connection Table 11- 10 Terminals -XK - connection for output coupling relay Terminal Designation Technical data from -K16:11 Basis from -K16:12 NC contact Maximum switching voltage: 250 V AC/DC, continuous limit current 6 A from -K16:14 NO contact Disconnection power (ohmic load), max 140 W at 24 V DC 1500 VA at 250 V AC Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm When ordering additional relays by specifying option Y60 several times, the following relays are numbered starting at -K17. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 238 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.5 Supplementary circuits Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]HV%&&& )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-17 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 239 Options 11.6 Motor-relevant options 11.6 Motor-relevant options 11.6.1 A06, brush wear monitoring, limit signal, isolated Category Motor-relevant options Function The evaluation is realized via an isolated signal contact in the motor (for Siemens DC motors, order code A06 according to Catalog DA12, Part 1, protection and monitoring equipment). In the case of a fault, depending on the parameterization of the converter unit, alarm A60025 (yellow LED on the AOP30) or fault F60025 (red LED on the AOP30). For parameterization to "fault", the group signal "fault" is displayed and the SINAMICS DCM is switched off. The messages "alarm" and "fault" can also be evaluated via the fieldbus interface. WARNING Safe electrical separation between the signal and power circuit of the motor must be guaranteed! Connection The brush length monitoring signal must comply with PELV according to DIN EN 61140. The signal is connected to terminal strip -X2, where it is supplied with 24 V. Table 11- 11 Terminal strip -X2 - connection for brush wear monitoring, isolated Terminal Designation Technical data 73 P24S External signaling contact 74 Binary input / binary output 4 Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm2 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 240 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.6 Motor-relevant options Parameter assignment The system-specific circuit diagram shows which binary input at the converter is used to evaluate this monitoring device. This binary input should be parameterized as input signal at p50486. As alarm: p2118[x] = 60025 p2119[x] = [2] As fault: p2118[x] = 60025 p2119[x] = [1] The parameterization of the binary input used must be defined on a project-specific basis. Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& )UDPHVL]HV%&&& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-18 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 241 Options 11.6 Motor-relevant options 11.6.2 A30, anti-condensation heating for motor up to maximum 2000 W, 230V Category Motor-relevant options Function An external supply is used (1-ph 230 V AC, 50/60 Hz), and must be protected with max. 16 A on the plant side. As soon as the "Operation" state no longer exists, the motor anticondensation heating is switched on. The feeder is protected against short-circuits in the drive converter using a 10 A miniature circuit breaker, characteristic C. For heating elements with a max. 2 000 W heating power. DANGER When the supply voltage for the motor anti-condensation heating is connected, dangerous voltages are present in the cabinet even when the main switch is open. Connection Table 11- 12 Terminal strip X4 - connection for anti-condensation heating supply Terminal Designation Technical data 5 - 230 V AC power supply 6 - PE - PE protective conductor Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm Note When option L50 is simultaneously selected (cabinet lighting) and/or L55 (cabinet anticondensation heating), these options can be supplied from one location. Terminals -X4:1, X4:3 and -X4:5, as well as the terminals -X4:2, -X4:4 and -X4:6 must then be connected with wire jumpers. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 242 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.6 Motor-relevant options Table 11- 13 Terminal strip X4 - connection for anti-condensation heating feeder Terminal Designation Technical data 6 - 7 - Feeder, motor anticondensation heating PE - PE protective conductor Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5mm Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H&& )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ 6KLHOGFRQQHFWLRQDQGVWUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQV 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-19 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 243 Options 11.6 Motor-relevant options 11.6.3 A97, air flow monitoring in the motor Category Motor-relevant options Function The evaluation is realized using an air-flow monitor, type "vent captor" (type: 3201.03) in the motor (order code A97 according to Catalog DA 12 Part 1, Protection and monitoring equipment and supplement DA 12, May 2001, Part 4). In the case of a fault, depending on the parameterization of the converter unit, alarm A60027 (yellow LED on the AOP30) or fault F60027 (red LED on the AOP30). When parameterized for "Fault", the "Fault" group message is displayed and the converter is switched off. The messages "alarm" and "fault" can also be evaluated via the fieldbus interface. No additional evaluation units are required. However, the data must be appropriately documented in the circuit manual. Connection Table 11- 14 Terminal strip X2 - connection for the air flow monitoring device Terminal Designation Technical data 81 P24S 24 V DC power supply 82 M 83 Binary input / binary output 3 "vent captor" signal Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm2 Parameter assignment The system-specific circuit diagram shows which binary input at the converter is used to evaluate this monitoring device. This binary input should be parameterized as input signal at p50488. As alarm: p2118[x] = 60027 p2119[x] = [2] As fault: p2118[x] = 60027 p2119[x] = [1] SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 244 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.6 Motor-relevant options Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& )UDPHVL]HV%&&& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-20 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 245 Options 11.6 Motor-relevant options 11.6.4 L86, evaluation unit for the following temperature sensors: KTY84-130, PT100 2-wire and 3-wire, PT1000 2-wire and 3-wire, NTC Category Motor-relevant options Function The PT100 evaluation unit can monitor up to three sensors. The sensors can be connected in a two or three-wire system. With the two-wire system, inputs xT1 and xT3 must be assigned and xT2 must be jumpered with xT3. With the three-wire system, input xT2 must also be connected (x = 1, 2, 3). The limit values can be freely programmed for each channel. Shielded signal cables are recommended. If this is not possible, the sensor cables should have at least have twisted-pair wires. Unused channels can be suppressed via parameters. Output relay K1 is used to signal when the "fault" limit value is reached at a converter binary input; output relay K2 is used to signal when the "alarm" limit value is reached at a converter binary input. Output relay K3 is used to signal that the evaluation unit is ready at the customer terminal strip -X2.7 .8. The power supply for the evaluation unit is taken from the internal control voltage. Connection Table 11- 15 N2-B41 - connection for evaluation unit PT100 resistors Terminal Designation Technical data 1T1-1T3 - PT100; sensor 1, SELV required 2T1-2T3 - PT100; sensor 2, SELV required 3T1-3T3 - PT100; sensor 3, SELV required Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5mm2 WARNING Safe electrical isolation between the sensor/signal and power circuit must be ensured. Commissioning According to the description of the evaluation unit (see operating instructions under the "Additional operating instructions" tab). SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 246 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.6 Motor-relevant options Parameter assignment The system-specific circuit diagram shows which binary inputs at the converter unit are used to evaluate this monitoring. Here is an example of a possible parameterization of the evaluation in converter: Set value r5310.10 at p2112 (evaluation, contact alarm at DIO5). Set value r5310.12 at p2106 (evaluation, contact fault at DIO6). See the operating instructions for the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, SINAMICS DCM DC Converter List Manual, operating instructions for the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter "Signal connections", project-specific circuit diagram as well as operating instructions under "Additional operating instructions". Reaction Applicable in the example above: In the event of an "alarm", "external alarm 1" (A7850) is triggered. In the event of a "shutdown", "external fault 1" (F7860) is triggered. Diagnostics For a description of messages output during operation and in the event of faults (meaning of LEDs at = N2-B41), refer to the "Additional operating instructions" section of this documentation package. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 247 Options 11.6 Motor-relevant options Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H&& )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ Figure 11-21 Cable routing (1) 11.6.5 W15, no output to be provided for a motor fan Category Motor-relevant options Function No output is provided for a motor fan. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 248 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.6 Motor-relevant options 11.6.6 W20 to W41, setting range of the motor circuit breaker for the motor fan Category Motor-relevant options Function The setting range of the motor circuit breaker for the motor fan is set differently than standard. The following motor circuit breaker setting ranges can be selected via options: Table 11- 16 Options of the motor circuit breaker setting ranges for the motor fan Option Setting range of the motor circuit breaker for the motor fan W20 0.11 A to 0.16 A W21 0.14 A to 0.2 A W22 0.18 A to 0.25 A W23 0.22 A to 0.32 A W24 0.28 A to 0.4 A W25 0.35 A to 0.5 A W26 0.45 A to 0.63 A W27 0.55 A to 0.8 A W28 0.7 A to 1.0 A W29 0.9 A to 1.25 A W30 1.1 A to 1.6 A W31 1.4 A to 2.0 A W32 1.8 A to 2.5 A W33 2.2 A to 3.2 A W34 2.8 A to 4.0 A W35 3.5 A to 5.0 A W36 4.5 A to 6.3 A W37 5.5 A to 8.0 A W38 7.0 A to 10.0 A W39 9.0 A to 12.5 A W40 11 A to 16 A W41 14 A to 20 A A three-phase feeder protected using a motor circuit breaker is provided to supply a motor fan as standard. The motor fan circuits are controlled using a contactor in the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet. The control is performed simultaneously with the device or cabinet fan via the output at the customer terminal strip X71:19. If none of the options W20 to W41 (motor fan 1) or W70 to W91 (motor fan 2) are selected, the setting range of the motor circuit breaker is set according to following table: SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 249 Options 11.6 Motor-relevant options Table 11- 17 Motor circuit breaker setting range for the standard motor fan feeder Rated DC current of the unit Setting range of the motor circuit breaker 15 A to 60 A 0.35 A to 0.5 A 90 A to 280 A 0.9 A to 1.25 A 400 A to 450 A 2.8 A to 4 A 600 A to 850 A 7 A to 10 A 950 A to 1200 A 11 A to 16 A 1500 A to 3000 A 2 x (11 A to 16 A) Note These options are intended for operation on grounded line supplies. Connection Table 11- 18 Terminal strip -X3 - connection for motor fan Terminal Designation Technical data 3 L1 Feeder, motor fan 1 4 L2 5 L3 PE PE PE protective conductor Max. connectable cross-section: 4 mm Commissioning The motor circuit breaker is set by the customer on the plant side. The setting must be documented in the system-specific circuit diagram when commissioning the system. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 250 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.6 Motor-relevant options Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H&& )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-22 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 251 Options 11.6 Motor-relevant options 11.6.7 W70 to W91, feeder for a second motor fan Category Motor-relevant options Function When one of the options W70 to W91 is selected, the system is equipped with an additional three-phase feeder for a second motor fan. Table 11- 19 Options of the motor circuit breaker setting ranges for the motor fan 2 Option Setting range of the motor circuit breaker for the second motor fan W70 0.11 A to 0.16 A W71 0.14 A to 0.2 A W72 0.18 A to 0.25 A W73 0.22 A to 0.32 A W74 0.28 A to 0.4 A W75 0.35 A to 0.5 A W76 0.45 A to 0.63 A W77 0.55 A to 0.8 A W78 0.7 A to 1.0 A W79 0.9 A to 1.25 A W80 1.1 A to 1.6 A W81 1.4 A to 2.0 A W82 1.8 A to 2.5 A W83 2.2 A to 3.2 A W84 2.8 A to 4.0 A W85 3.5 A to 5.0 A W86 4.5 A to 6.3 A W87 5.5 A to 8.0 A W88 7.0 A to 10.0 A W89 9.0 A to 12.5 A W90 11 A to 16 A W91 14 A to 20 A The motor fan circuits are controlled using a contactor in the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet. The control is performed simultaneously with the device or cabinet fan via the output at the customer terminal strip X71:19. Note These options are intended for operation on grounded line supplies. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 252 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.6 Motor-relevant options Connection Table 11- 20 Terminal strip -X3 - connection for motor fan 2 Terminal Designation Technical data 6 L1 Feeder, motor fan 2 7 L2 8 L3 PE PE PE protective conductor Max. connectable cross-section: 4 mm Commissioning The motor circuit breaker is set by the customer on the plant side. The setting must be documented in the system-specific circuit diagram when commissioning the system. Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H&& )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-23 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 253 Options 11.6 Motor-relevant options 11.6.8 Y01, matching transformer for motor fan Category Motor-relevant options Function Choose this option if the rated voltage of the motor fan differs from the 3 AC auxiliary voltage. The required secondary voltage of the matching transformer and the power must be specified in plain text. Up to 3 AC 500 V (primary or secondary), the matching transformer is an autotransformer. Under unfavorable secondary conditions, this option can result in increased cabinet dimensions. Connection Is connected up in the manufacturer's factory. Commissioning Checking the setting of the transformer circuit breaker Diagnostics The signal contact of the assigned transformer circuit breaker is included in the group fault signal "circuit breaker tripped" in the signaling circuit. This group fault signal is provided as an isolated contact at terminal strip -X2.1 .2. For details refer to the operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter, Electrical installation/other connections. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 254 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.7 Monitoring functions 11.7 Monitoring functions 11.7.1 B83, overvoltage protection Category Monitoring functions Function A SICROWBAR AC overvoltage protection device is installed to protect the power semiconductors and is connected to the armature power supply. Overvoltages that occur on the AC side of converters are mainly caused by switching operations when disconnecting from the line supply at the transformer primary. This applies both to operational switching operations (shutdown at no-load) as well as in the case of a fault (shutdown under load). Mode of operation: If an overvoltage occurs, which reaches the response voltage of the integrated firing module, then the break-over diodes trigger and in turn trigger their associated thyristors. As a consequence, the varistors are switched to the line supply. The varistors absorb the overvoltage energy. An RC protective circuit protects the thyristors against an excessively steep voltage rate of rise when the current is interrupted. Details of the overvoltage protection device as well as information for its selection are described in Catalog D23.12010, Chapter 4. Note A supplementary cabinet is required with this option, 400 mm or 600 mm wide. An installation altitude 2000 m in connection with this option must be clarified on request. DANGER When the power supply is connected, dangerous voltages are present in the cabinet unit even when the main circuit breaker is open. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 255 Options 11.7 Monitoring functions Connection Table 11- 21 Terminal strip -X2 - connection for the fuse blown / disconnector state signal in the overvoltage protection device Terminal Technical data 41 Micro switch: 42 230 V AC, 50 Hz, 7 A 43 30 V DC, 5 A Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm2 Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& )UDPHVL]HV%&&& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-24 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 256 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.7 Monitoring functions 11.7.2 L52, ARC detector (arcing detector) Category Monitoring functions Function A device to monitor the cabinet system for arcing faults is installed. Here, light sensors inside the cabinet monitor any arcing, and if arcing is detected, the system is shut down with an Emergency Stop; the main contactor or supply circuit breaker is opened. Note A 24 V DC power supply is required (option L06, L07 or L09). 11.7.3 L82, fault current monitoring in the grounded line supply (TN or TT supply system) Category Monitoring functions Function An electronic differential relay monitors the armature circuit for any fault current with respect to ground (PE). If a ground fault occurs, then the "Ground fault" signal is issued. The signal relay is routed to the customer terminal strip. The customer is responsible for evaluating the signal. This option only includes monitoring the armature circuit, the fault current monitoring for the auxiliary circuit or circuits must be realized on the plant side. Note For protection using a differential current monitor for shutdown, the protective conductor or PEN conductor of the cables for the cabinet supply and motor armature circuit are dimensioned according to DIN VDE 0100, Part 540. Line conductor cross-section according to DIN VDE 0160. As a consequence, generally the cable cross-section can be reduced. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 257 Options 11.7 Monitoring functions Connection Table 11- 22 Terminal strip -X2 - connection for fault current relay monitor Terminal Designation Technical data 31 18 Signaling relay ALARM (basic) 32 17 Signaling relay ALARM (NC contact) 33 19 Signaling relay ALARM (NO contact) 37 T1 External test button 38 T2 External test button 39 R1 External reset button (NC contact or wire jumper) 40 R2 External reset button Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm 24 V DC or 230 V AC circuits can be connected at the terminals of terminal strip -X2. There is safe electrical isolation to other circuits. For example, it is possible to connect a PLC. All terminals of the option must be operated with the same voltage level. Diagnostics For a description of messages output during operation and in the event of faults (meaning of LEDs at = D3-F15), refer to the "Additional operating instructions" section of this documentation package. Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 258 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.7 Monitoring functions )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& )UDPHVL]HV%&&& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-25 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 259 Options 11.7 Monitoring functions 11.7.4 L84, PTC evaluation device for alarm and fault for two sensors Category Monitoring functions Function This option includes a thermistor motor protection device (with PTB approval) for PTC temperature sensors (PTC thermistors, type A) for alarm and trip. The power supply for the thermistor motor protection device is realized in the cabinet. Connection Table 11- 23 N2-B11 - connection for thermistor motor protection device Equipment identifier Description of function =N2-B11: 1T1, T2 Thermistor motor protection (alarm) =N2-B11: 2T1, T2 Thermistor motor protection (shutdown) Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm Table 11- 24 Maximum cable length for the sensor circuit Conductor cross-sections in mm Cable length in m 2.5 2 x 2800 1.5 2 x 1500 0.5 2 x 500 WARNING Safe electrical isolation between the sensor/signal and power circuit must be ensured. Commissioning According to the description of the evaluation unit (see operating instructions under the "Additional operating instructions" tab). Parameter assignment The system-specific circuit diagram shows which binary inputs at the converter unit are used to evaluate this monitoring. Here is an example of a possible parameterization of the evaluation in converter: SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 260 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.7 Monitoring functions Set value r5310.10 at p2112 (evaluation, contact alarm at DIO5). Set value r5310.12 at p2106 (evaluation, contact fault at DIO6). See the operating instructions for the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, SINAMICS DCM DC Converter List Manual, operating instructions for the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter "Signal connections", project-specific circuit diagram as well as operating instructions under "Additional operating instructions". Reaction With the above parameter assignment: In the event of an "alarm", "external alarm 1" (A7850) is triggered. In the event of a "shutdown", "external fault 1" (F7860) is triggered. Diagnostics For a description of messages output during operation and in the event of faults (meaning of LEDs at = N2-B11), refer to the "Additional operating instructions" section of this documentation package. Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 261 Options 11.7 Monitoring functions )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H&& )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ Figure 11-26 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 262 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.7 Monitoring functions 11.7.5 L87, insulation monitoring in non-grounded line supplies (IT system) with insulating monitoring devices from the Bender company Category Monitoring functions Function In the armature circuit insulation (three-phase and DC connections), the insulation monitor monitors insulation status to ground. If a ground fault occurs, this is signaled using a signal lamp (yellow) and the "Earth leakage" signal at a terminal. An additional coupling device is used for rated supply voltages above 3 AC 690 V. Note For protection using insulation monitoring in non-grounded line supplies, potential bonding is required for the cabinet and motor as well as the conductive parts that can be simultaneously touched. Protective conductor cross-section: according to DIN VDE 0100, Part 540. Line conductor cross-section according to DIN VDE 0160. When the main switch/circuit breaker is closed, external ground faults, which occur in the line supply outside the converter system, are also detected and signaled by the ground fault monitoring in the drive cabinet. Insulation monitor settings should be made during commissioning. Note The auxiliary power supply in the basic version is not influenced by this option. The auxiliary power supply must be provided from a grounded line supply. Connection Table 11- 25 Terminal strip -X2 - connection for the insulation monitor Terminal Designation Technical data 31 - Signaling relay ALARM 1 (basis) 32 - Signaling relay ALARM 1 (NC contact) 33 - Signaling relay ALARM 1 (NO contact) 34 - Signaling relay ALARM 2 (basis) 35 - Signaling relay ALARM 2 (NC contact) 36 - Signaling relay ALARM 2 (NO contact) 37 T1 External test button 38 T2 External test button 39 R1 External reset button (NC contact or wire jumper) 40 R2 External reset button Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 263 Options 11.7 Monitoring functions 24 V DC or 230 V AC circuits can be connected at the terminals of terminal strip -X2. There is safe electrical isolation to other circuits. For example, it is possible to connect a PLC. All terminals of the option must be operated with the same voltage level. Commissioning According to the description of the insulation monitor. Parameter assignment According to the description of the insulation monitor. Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& )UDPHVL]HV%&&& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-27 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 264 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.7 Monitoring functions 11.7.6 L88, insulation monitoring in non-grounded line supplies (IT system) with insulating monitoring devices from the AREVA company Category Monitoring functions Function In the armature circuit insulation (three-phase and DC connections), the insulation monitor monitors insulation status to ground. If a ground fault occurs, this is signaled using a signal lamp (yellow) and the "Earth leakage" signal at a terminal. An additional coupling device is used for rated supply voltages above 3 AC 690 V. NOTICE When using option L88, the following restriction applies in terms of immunity to conducted disturbances, induced by high-frequency fields (test and measuring procedure according to EN 61000-4 -6): Noise immunity level 2 as opposed to 3 specified in the EMC product standard EN 61800-3. Note For protection using insulation monitoring in non-grounded line supplies, potential bonding is required for the cabinet and motor as well as the conductive parts that can be simultaneously touched. Protective conductor cross-section: according to DIN VDE 0100, Part 540. Line conductor cross-section according to DIN VDE 0160. When the main switch/circuit breaker is closed, external ground faults, which occur in the line supply outside the converter system, are also detected and signaled by the ground fault monitoring in the drive cabinet. Insulation monitor settings should be made during commissioning. Note The auxiliary power supply in the basic version is not influenced by this option. The auxiliary power supply must be provided from a grounded line supply. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 265 Options 11.7 Monitoring functions Connection Table 11- 26 Terminal strip -X2 - connection for the insulation monitor Terminal Designation Technical data 31 - Signaling relay ALARM 1 (basis) 32 - Signaling relay ALARM 1 (NC contact) 33 - Signaling relay ALARM 1 (NO contact) 34 - Signaling relay ALARM 2 (basis) 35 - Signaling relay ALARM 2 (NC contact) 36 - Signaling relay ALARM 2 (NO contact) 37 T1 External test button 38 T2 External test button 39 R1 External reset button (NC contact or wire jumper) 40 R2 External reset button Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm 24 V DC or 230 V AC circuits can be connected at the terminals of terminal strip -X2. There is safe electrical isolation to other circuits. For example, it is possible to connect a PLC. All terminals of the option must be operated with the same voltage level. Commissioning According to the description of the insulation monitor. Parameter assignment According to the description of the insulation monitor. Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 266 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.7 Monitoring functions )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& )UDPHVL]HV%&&& 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-28 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 267 Options 11.7 Monitoring functions 11.7.7 L90, CCP (Converter Commutation Protector) Category Monitoring functions Function The Converter Commutation Protector SIMOREG CCP is used to protect line-commutated SINAMICS DCM DC Converters in inverter operation against inverter commutation faults. SIMOREG CCP limits the current that flows when inverter commutation faults occur to a non-hazardous value so that the thyristors and the associated super-fast fuses are protected. For line-commutated converters, an appropriate line-side counter voltage is required in order to commutate the current between the individual power semiconductors. Commutation can be prevented from being completed (commutation fault) as a result of uncontrolled switching operations, line supply dips (weak line supplies, thunderstorms, etc.). As a result, in the regenerative feedback direction, a high current flows through the line supply or a crosscurrent in the converter. This can result in fuses blowing or under certain circumstances can destroy the semiconductors. The software of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter identifies if inverter commutation faults are pending and then issues the command to turn off the power semiconductors in the converter to the SIMOREG CCP. SIMOREG CCP then turns off the power semiconductors, ensures that the conditions to reduce the current in the motor are present and absorbs the magnetic energy stored in the motor as electric energy. Benefits: This eliminates the complex and time consuming replacement of fuses after inverter commutation faults. Although inverter commutation faults cannot be prevented, their effects can be. Gearboxes and the driven machine are protected by shutting off the current in time before it reaches its possible maximum value in the case of a fault therefore protecting them against inadmissibly high torque surges. For high rated system currents, up until now, high-speed DC circuit-breakers were used up until now to protect the fuses against rupture. By using the CCP, protection is now cost-effectively possible even for lower line currents, whereby SIMOREG CCP has the following advantages when compared to high-speed DC circuit-breakers even at high current levels: - Protection also for circulating currents - Lower system costs - Lower space requirements - No additional air reactor to reduce the current rate-of-rise when a fault occurs - Lower operating costs, as it requires no maintenance - High degree of availability SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 268 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.7 Monitoring functions Additional information for commissioning and the function of the SIMOREG CCP can be taken from the operating instructions and Catalog D 23.1. Connection See the operating instructions for the CCP Commissioning See the operating instructions for the CCP Parameter assignment p50790 = [6] CCP-relevant parameters: r51560...p51583 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 269 Options 11.7 Monitoring functions 11.7.8 L99, monitoring the temperature inside the drive cabinet Category Monitoring functions Function The temperature is monitored in two stages. The response temperature for the alarm is 5 C below the fault signal threshold. This is oriented to the overload capability of the converter and results in the drive being shut down. The fault message can be deselected by making the appropriate parameter settings. For additional information, please refer to the operating instructions SINAMICS DCM DC Converter in Chapter, Function descriptions/sensors for ambient and air intake temperature. Commissioning At p50077, the derating factor must be set for power derating as a result of increased installation altitude (K2 according to the following table), and not the derating factor K=K1xK2: Table 11- 27 Derating factor Site altitude (installation altitude) Derating factor K2 1000 m 1 2000 m 0.835 3000 m 0.74 4000 m 0.71 5000 m 0.67 Notes on replacing a SINAMICS DCM in a SINAMICS DCM Cabinet The replacement device must have option L15 or L99 The software version of the replacement device must be V1.3 HF1 or higher. If necessary, update the software. The software version can be read out of parameter r50060. NOTICE If option L15 or L99 is not available or the software version is prior to V1.3 HF1, then "Protection against thermal hazards" according to EN 61800-5-1 Section 4.2 is not guaranteed. EN 61800: Electric power drives with adjustable speed Part 5-1: Safety requirements SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 270 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.8 Supplementary modules 11.8 Supplementary modules 11.8.1 G60, customer terminal block extension using a Terminal Module TM31 Category Supplementary modules Function Customer terminal expansion module TM31 The following are located on the TM31 Terminal Module: 8 digital inputs 4 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs 2 relay outputs with changeover contact 2 analog inputs 2 analog outputs 1 temperature sensor input (KTY84-130 or PTC) A detailed description is provided in the operating instructions for SINAMICS DCM DC Converter and in Catalog D 23.1. Note For this option, an Advanced CUD with DRIVE-CLiQ port (G00, G11) and a 24 V DC power supply (L06, L07 or L09) are required. Connection The connection is made directly at the TM31 Terminal Module. Description of the connections, see Catalog D23.1. Commissioning See the operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, List Manual of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter, "Signal connections". SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 271 Options 11.8 Supplementary modules Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H&& 'HWDLO$ 'HWDLO$ $ $ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ 6KLHOGLQJRUVWUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ Figure 11-29 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 272 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.8 Supplementary modules )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& 'HWDLO$ $ 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-30 Cable routing (2) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 273 Options 11.8 Supplementary modules 11.8.2 G62, customer terminal block extension using a Terminal Module TM15 Category Supplementary modules Function The following are located on the TM15 Terminal Module: 24 bidirectional digital inputs/outputs (potential isolation in 3 groups, each with 8 channels). A detailed description is provided in the operating instructions for SINAMICS DCM DC Converter and in Catalog D 23.1. Note For this option, an Advanced CUD with DRIVE-CLiQ port (G00, G11) and a 24 V DC power supply (L06, L07 or L09) are required. Connection The connection is made directly at the TM15 Terminal Module. Description of the connections, see Catalog D23.1. Commissioning See the operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, List Manual of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter, "Signal connections". SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 274 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.8 Supplementary modules Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H&& 'HWDLO$ 'HWDLO$ $ $ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ 6KLHOGLQJRUVWUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ Figure 11-31 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 275 Options 11.8 Supplementary modules )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& 'HWDLO$ $ 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-32 Cable routing (2) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 276 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.8 Supplementary modules 11.8.3 K50, Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30 Category Supplementary modules Function The CUD of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter can already evaluate the signals of an incremental encoder. For applications where more than one encoder must be evaluated, either a second CUD and/or Sensor Module Cabinet-Mounted SMC30 can be used. The SMC30 can be used to evaluate SSI encoders with incremental signals, which for instance, are used for positioning functions. Encoders, which have a DRIVE-CLiQ interface, cannot be evaluated at the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter or at the SMC30. These encoders are generally not used in DC drive technology. The following encoder signals can be evaluated: Incremental encoders TTL/HTL with and without wire break detection (wire break detection is only available with bipolar signals) SSI encoder with TTL/HTL incremental signals SSI encoder without incremental signals The motor temperature input, available on the SMC30, is not evaluated for SINAMICS DCM DC Converter. A motor temperature sensor can be evaluated using the temperature measurement input provided on each CUD. Note For this option, an Advanced CUD with DRIVE-CLiQ port (G00, G11) and a 24 V DC power supply (L06, L07 or L09) are required. Connection The connection is made directly at the Sensor Module SMC30. Description of the connections, see Catalog D23.1. Commissioning See the operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, List Manual of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter, "Signal connections". SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 277 Options 11.8 Supplementary modules Cable routing The cables are routed into the cabinet corresponding to the following diagrams. )UDPHVL]H%& )UDPHVL]H&& 'HWDLO$ 'HWDLO$ $ $ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ 6KLHOGLQJRUVWUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ Figure 11-33 Cable routing (1) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 278 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.8 Supplementary modules )UDPHVL]HV'&(&)& 'HWDLO$ $ 6KLHOGVXSSRUWRSWLRQ 6WUDLQUHOLHIRSWLRQ Figure 11-34 Cable routing (2) SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 279 Options 11.9 Mechanical options 11.9 Mechanical options 11.9.1 M21, degree of protection IP21 Category Mechanical options Function Cabinet version in IP20, but with additional roof or canopy. This increases the cabinet height by 75 up to 250 mm depending on the size. For transport reasons, the top or drip protection covers are delivered separately and must be fitted on site. For degree of protection IP21, in the following drive cabinets, structured according to the rated DC current, an additional fan is integrated in addition to the unit fan. Table 11- 28 Variations in the technical data due to the use of an additional fan Rated DC current 15 ... 125 A Additional fan Yes Air flow Noise level 800 m3/h 72 dB(A) m3/h 72 dB(A) 210 ... 280 A Yes 800 400 ... 600 A No 600 m3/h 74 dB(A) No m3/h 74 dB(A) 720 ... 850 A 600 m3/h 950 ... 1200 A No 1000 1500 ... 3000 A No 3000 m3/h 76 dB(A) 78 dB(A) Note The drive cabinet must be provided with the required airflow (dependent on the degree of protection) in an appropriate quality. The minimum clearance between the upper edge of the cabinet and the ceiling height can be seen from the dimension drawings and is defined in the operating instructions, Chapter Installation. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 280 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.9 Mechanical options 11.9.2 M23, IP23 degree of protection Category Mechanical options Function Converter cabinets with IP23 degree of protection are supplied with additional roof covers with integrated fans, as well as plastic ventilation grilles and a filter medium in the air inlet. The cabinet height is increased by between 130 and 400 mm. The filter medium (1 mm mesh size) must be maintained according to the local environmental conditions. For transport-related reasons, the roof sections are delivered separately and must be fitted by the customer. For degree of protection IP23, in the following drive cabinets, structured according to the rated DC current, an additional fan is integrated in addition to the unit fan. Table 11- 29 Variations in the technical data due to the use of an additional fan Rated DC current Additional fan Air flow 15 ... 125 A Yes 800 210 ... 280 A Yes 800 m3/h Noise level m3/h 72 dB(A) 72 dB(A) 400 ... 600 A Yes 3000 720 ... 850 A Yes 3000 m3/h 80 dB(A) Yes 3000 m3/h 84 dB(A) 3000 m3/h 83 dB(A) 950 ... 1200 A 1500 ... 3000 A Yes m3/h 81 dB(A) Note The drive cabinet must be provided with the required airflow (dependent on the degree of protection) in an appropriate quality. The minimum clearance between the upper edge of the cabinet and the ceiling height can be seen from the dimension drawings and is defined in the operating instructions, Chapter Installation. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 281 Options 11.9 Mechanical options 11.9.3 M43, degree of protection IP43 Category Mechanical options Function Converter cabinets with IP43 degree of protection are supplied with additional roof sections with integrated fans, as well as plastic ventilation grilles and a filter medium (1 mm mesh size) in the air inlet and air outlet. The cabinet height is increased by between 130 and 400 mm. The filter medium must be maintained according to the local environmental conditions. For transport-related reasons, the roof sections are delivered separately and must be fitted by the customer. For degree of protection IP43, in the following drive cabinets, structured according to the rated DC current, an additional fan is integrated in addition to the unit fan. Table 11- 30 Variations in the technical data due to the use of an additional fan Rated DC current Additional fan Air flow 15 ... 125 A Yes 800 210 ... 280 A Yes 800 m3/h Noise level m3/h 72 dB(A) 72 dB(A) 400 ... 600 A Yes 3000 720 ... 850 A Yes 3000 m3/h 80 dB(A) Yes 3000 m3/h 84 dB(A) 3000 m3/h 83 dB(A) 950 ... 1200 A 1500 ... 3000 A Yes m3/h 81 dB(A) Note The drive cabinet must be provided with the required airflow (dependent on the degree of protection) in an appropriate quality. The minimum clearance between the upper edge of the cabinet and the ceiling height can be seen from the dimension drawings and is defined in the operating instructions, Chapter Installation. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 282 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.9 Mechanical options 11.9.4 M54, degree of protection IP54 with filter elements Category Mechanical options Function SINAMICS DCM Cabinet in IP54 degree of protection is supplied with additional roof section with integrated fan, plastic ventilation grilles, and a filter medium in the air inlet and outlet, which ensures compliance with IP54 degree of protection. This increases the cabinet height by 400 mm. The filters must be maintained according to the local environmental conditions. For transport-related reasons, the roof sections are delivered separately and must be fitted by the customer. For degree of protection IP54, in the following drive cabinets, structured according to the rated DC current, an additional fan is integrated in addition to the unit fan. Table 11- 31 Variations in the technical data due to the use of an additional fan Rated DC current Additional fan Air flow Noise level 15 ... 125 A Yes 1000 210 ... 280 A Yes 1000 m3/h 74 dB(A) 400 ... 600 A Yes 3000 m3/h 81 dB(A) 720 ... 850 A Yes 3000 m3/h 80 dB(A) Yes 3000 m3/h 84 dB(A) 3000 m3/h 83 dB(A) 950 ... 1200 A 1500 ... 3000 A Yes m3/h 74 dB(A) Note The drive cabinet must be provided with the required airflow (dependent on the degree of protection) in an appropriate quality. The minimum clearance between the upper edge of the cabinet and the ceiling height can be seen from the dimension drawings and is defined in the operating instructions, Chapter Installation. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 283 Options 11.9 Mechanical options 11.9.5 M58, degree of protection IP54 with climate control system Category Mechanical options Function SINAMICS DCM Cabinet in degree of protection IP54 is equipped with additional climate controlled units to ensure adequate cooling when the cabinet is closed. In addition to avoiding pollution and dirt and preventing the ingress of foreign bodies and water, this also allows the drive units to be operated in hot environments, as a result of the climate and/or process heat. 11.9.6 M59, closed cabinet door, air inlet from below through floor opening Category Mechanical options Function If SINAMICS DC MASTER Cabinet are mounted on a false floor or duct which forms part of a forced ventilation system, then they can be operated with the cabinet doors closed. To ensure an adequate air-inlet cross-section, the units are shipped without the standard baseplates. In this case, the customer must ensure that no dirt, conductive dust, moisture or small animals can enter the cabinets. Cables must not be routed in such a way that they impede the flow of air through the cabinet floor opening. If the area beneath the drive units can be accessed, then the customer must provide touch protection on the plant side. NOTICE The cooling air requirement specified in the technical data must be guaranteed. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 284 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.9 Mechanical options 11.9.7 M60, additional shock protection Category Mechanical options Function In the basic version of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, in compliance with the current standards, finger and back of hand protection is ensured when the cabinet doors are open. With option M60, the drive cabinets are equipped with additional touch protection corresponding to BGV A3. 11.9.8 M66, marine version Category Mechanical options Function The cabinets are designed and implemented according to the requirements for marine applications. The certification must be carried out separately. When the order is placed, in compliance with the requirements of the specified classification societies (the following can be selected: Lloyds Register of Shipping, American Bureau of Shipping, Germanischer Lloyd or Det Norske Veritas), individual acceptance is carried out in the factory. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 285 Options 11.10 Other options 11.10 Other options 11.10.1 K07, without Advanced Operator Panel AOP30 Category Other options Function The Advanced Operator Panel AOP30 is not provided. The AOP30 is not installed in the cabinet door and is not supplied the equipment. 11.10.2 L91, commissioning interface (PROFIBUS) routed to the outside Category Other options Function This option is provided for systems where, during normal operation, the control is not realized via PROFIBUS or PROFINET. For improved accessibility during commissioning and for diagnostic purposes, the commissioning interface (PROFIBUS) is routed through the doors of the cabinet. This interface in the cabinet door is not intended for the continuous control of the drive. The cable bushing in the cabinet is equipped with a protective cover. Connection Is connected up in the manufacturer's factory. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 286 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.10 Other options 11.10.3 U09, version according to the requirements of UL Category Other options Function The converter cabinet is designed and built corresponding to UL specifications. The option does not include any certification. After prior agreement, a special inspection can be carried out in the factory on request. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 287 Options 11.11 Documentation 11.11 Documentation 11.11.1 D19, circuit diagram prepared for motor overtemperature monitoring using a limit value transmitter Category Documentation Function The evaluation is realized using an isolated signaling contact in the motor (order code A31 according to Catalog DA 12 * 2008, Protection and monitoring). The customer connection is realized at the TMC terminal adapter. Connection Table 11- 32 Terminal strip -X2 - connection for binary motor temperature monitoring Terminal Designation Technical data 91 P24S External signaling contact 92 Binary input / binary output 1 Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm2 The signal at X2.91 .92 must fulfill PELV according to DIN EN 61140. Commissioning See the operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, List Manual of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter, "Signal connections". Parameter assignment p50489 is parameterized corresponding to the binary input used for the specific project. Reaction F60028 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 288 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.11 Documentation 11.11.2 D20, circuit diagram prepared for motor temperature monitoring Category Documentation Function PT100, PT1000, KTY84-130, PTC or NTC motor temperature monitoring devices can be directly evaluated in the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter. When specifying the option, for the corresponding temperature input, this is documented in the circuit diagram. The customer connection is realized at the TMC terminal adapter. Connection Table 11- 33 Terminal strip -X71 - connection for a temperature sensor Terminal Designation Technical data 53 Temp1 Temperature sensor 54 Temp2 (sense) 55 Temp1 Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm2 If a sense cable is not used for compensating the cable resistances (two-wire sensor), then terminals 54 and 55 must be connected. Commissioning See the operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, List Manual of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter, "Signal connections". Parameter assignment Set the selected sensor type at p50490. Set the alarm temperature at p50491. Set the shutdown temperature at p50492. Reaction A60032 Motor temperature alarm F60029 Motor temperature fault F60096 Temperature sensor faulty SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 289 Options 11.11 Documentation 11.11.3 D21, circuit diagram prepared for speed actual value sensing (pulse encoder) Category Documentation Function The connection of the speed actual value sensing using an incremental encoder is shown in the circuit diagram. The customer connection is realized at the TMC terminal adapter. Connection Table 11- 34 Terminal strip -X71 - connection for an incremental encoder Terminal Designation Technical data 41 Incremental encoder supply Incremental encoder 42 Incremental encoder ground 43 Track 1 positive connection 44 Track 1 negative connection 45 Track 2 positive connection 46 Track 2 negative connection 47 Zero mark positive connection 48 Zero mark negative connection Max. connectable cross-section: 1.5 mm2 Commissioning See the operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, List Manual of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter, "Signal connections". Parameter assignment Set p50083 = 2 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 290 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Options 11.11 Documentation 11.11.4 D22, circuit diagram prepared for speed actual value sensing (analog tachometer) Category Documentation Function The connection of the speed actual value sensing using an analog tachometer is shown in the circuit diagram. The customer connection is established at the Power Interface of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter at terminal strip -XT1. Connection Table 11- 35 Terminal block -XT1 - analog tachometer connection Terminal Technical data 103 Analog tachometer 104 8...270 V Max. connectable cross-section: 2.5 mm2 Commissioning See the operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, List Manual of the SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, operating instructions of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet, Chapter, "Signal connections". Parameter assignment Set p50083 = 1 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 291 Options 11.11 Documentation SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 292 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 A Appendix A.1 Connectable conductor cross-sections for screw terminals CAUTION The information regarding the connection capability of the terminals in the tables below is based on values from the terminal data sheets. The connecting cables must be dimensioned for the currents that will flow. Table A- 1 Terminal data SPT 1.5 Terminal type Spring terminal Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG/kcmil): 0.2-1.5 / 0.2-1.5 / 24-16 Flexible with end sleeve with/without plastic sleeve: 0.25-1.5 / 0.25-0.75 mm2 (stripped length, 8 mm) Stripped length 10 mm ST2.5-Quattro / ST2.5-Quattro-PE Terminal type Spring terminal Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG/kcmil): 0.08-4 / 0.08-2.5 / 28-12 Stripped length 10 mm ST4 / ST4-PE / ST4-Quattro / ST4-Quattro-PE Terminal type Spring terminal Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG/kcmil): 0.08-6 / 0.08-4 / 28-10 Stripped length 10 mm ST6 / ST6-PE Terminal type Spring terminal Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG/kcmil): 0.2-10 / 0.2-6 / 24-8 Stripped length 12 mm ST10 / ST10-PE Terminal type Spring terminal Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG/kcmil): 0.2-16 / 0.2-10 / 24-6 Stripped length 18 mm ST35 / ST35-PE Terminal type Spring terminal Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG/kcmil): 2.5-35 / 2.5-35 / 14-2 Stripped length 25 mm SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 293 Appendix A.1 Connectable conductor cross-sections for screw terminals UK35 Terminal type Screw terminal Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG/kcmil): 0.75-50 / 0.75-35 / 18-0/1 Stripped length 16 mm Tightening torque 3.2 - 3.7 Nm UKH25 Terminal type Screw terminal Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG/kcmil): 6-25 / 10-25 / 10-3 Stripped length 17 mm Tightening torque 4 - 4.5 Nm UKH50 Terminal type Screw terminal Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG/kcmil): 16-70 / 25-70 / 6-2/0 Stripped length 24 mm Tightening torque 6 - 8 Nm UKH70 Terminal type Screw terminal Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG/kcmil): 16-95 / 25-70 / 4-3/0 Stripped length 24 mm Tightening torque 8 - 10 Nm UKH95 Terminal type Screw terminal Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG/kcmil): 25-95 / 35-95 / 4-3/0 Stripped length 33 mm Tightening torque 15 - 20 Nm UKH150 Terminal type Screw terminal Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG/kcmil): 35-150 / 50-150 / 2-300 Stripped length 40 mm Tightening torque 25 - 30 Nm UKH240 Terminal type Screw terminal Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG/kcmil): 70-240 / 70-240 / 2/0-500 Stripped length 40 mm Tightening torque 25 - 30 Nm USLKG35 Terminal type Screw terminal Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG/kcmil): 0.75-50 / 0.75-50 / 18-1/0 Stripped length 15 mm Tightening torque 3.2 - 3.7 Nm USLKG50 Terminal type Screw terminal Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG/kcmil): 16-70 / 25-70 / 6-1/0 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 294 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Appendix A.1 Connectable conductor cross-sections for screw terminals Stripped length 24 mm Tightening torque 6 - 8 Nm UKH150-GNYE Terminal type Screw terminal Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG/kcmil): 35-150 / 50-150 / 2-300 Stripped length 40 mm Tightening torque 25 - 30 Nm MCZ OVP TAZ diode 24VUC Terminal type Spring terminal Connection capacity Rigid/flexible/conductor sizes (mm2/mm2/AWG/kcmil): 0.5-1.5 / 0.5-1.5 / 22-16 Stripped length 10 mm SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 295 Appendix A.2 Environment, resources and recycling A.2 Environment, resources and recycling Siemens AG feels a responsibility to play a role in protecting our environment and saving our valuable natural resources. This is true for both our production and our products. Even during development, we consider any possible environmental impact of future products/systems. Our aim is to prevent harmful environmental effects or at least to reduce them to an absolute minimum - above and beyond present regulations and legislation. Environmental aspects during development The use of hazardous substances (e.g. arsenic, asbestos, beryllium, cadmium, CFCS, halogen and many others) has been avoided from the development stage onward. Easy-to-dismantle connections have been implemented and attention has been paid to increased purity of the materials used. In addition, recyclable materials have been preferred, or materials that can be easily disposed of. The use of highly-integrated components has enabled the number of parts to be kept to a minimum, with energy being used as efficiently as possible during production as a result. Particular emphasis has been placed on ensuring that the metal and plastic parts have a low volume and low weight, and that the number of different types is kept to a minimum. Pollutant-free materials have been used for all significant parts. No flame retardants containing halogen or insulation materials containing silicone have been used. Environmental compatibility was a key criterion in selecting supplier parts. Front parts: PC + ABS Bayblend Plastic parts in the unit: PC Lexan 915-R Rating plate: Polyester film Bayer Insulating parts from Lexan- Tfl SN50709-PC(FR)-fl- Makrolon F4 or Lexan according to or Makrolon- plates UL94-HB Mounting rails made from Durostone UPM71 DIN EN 60893-UP-GM-201 to 205 fiber optic pressed material Cable ducts Hard PVC CSA listed file no. 22009 Self-extinguishing according to UL94 V0 Heat-resistant -5 C to +60 C Environmental aspects during production The majority of supplier parts are transported in reusable packaging. The packing material itself is recyclable, and consists mainly of cardboard. Surface coatings have been omitted as far as possible. The production processes do not produce any emissions. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 296 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Appendix A.2 Environment, resources and recycling For production, the materials are marked according to their recycling route. Components that unavoidably contain dangerous substances are marked in particular. These components are also installed so that they can be easily removed, facilitating environmentally friendly disposal. Shipping Environmentally friendly packing materials are used for shipping and storage. Reusable packing is used where possible. Disposal The unit features screw-in and snap-in connections that can be easily released in order to separate it into different mechanical components for recycling purposes. The printed circuit boards may be used in recycling processes involving energy recovery. The proportion of components containing hazardous substances is low. Plans have been made to dispose of the SINAMICS DCM Cabinet after its service in accordance with the WEEE Directive. Note When disposing of the AOP30 operator panel, the backup battery must be removed (lithium battery, type CR2032 3 V) and disposed of in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines and applicable country-specific laws and regulations. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 297 Appendix A.3 Standards A.3 Standards Basic standards EN 61800-5-1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 5-1: Requirements regarding safety, electrical, thermal, and energy requirements EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Part 1: General requirements EN 61800-3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems - Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods EN 50274 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies: Protection against electric shock - Protection against unintentional direct contact with hazardous live parts EN 50110-1 Operation of electrical installations Reference standards SN 29500-1 Component failure rates: Anticipated values, general SN 36350-1 Environmentally compatible products, Part 1: Product design guidelines ISO 12100-1 Safety of Machinery - basic terminology, general principles for design Part 1: Basic terminology, methodology SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 298 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Appendix A.4 Certifications A.4 Certifications Korean Certification (KC) The EMC limit values to be complied with for Korea correspond to the limit values of the EMC product standard for variable-speed electric drives EN 61800-3, category C2 or limit value class A1 according to EN 55011. With suitable additional measures, the limit values according to category C2 or according to limit value class A1 are maintained. Use of an additional RFI suppression filter (EMC filters such as line filter, option L00) and proper EMC-compliant installation of the cabinet is required. SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 299 Appendix A.4 Certifications SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 300 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Index A Accessory kit Original roof screws, 43 Acknowledging errors, 109 Acknowledging faults, 109 Alarms, 108 Analog inputs, 83 Analog outputs, 84 AOP30 Battery replacement, 120 Auxiliary Supply 230 V AC, 79 24 V DC, 79 B Block diagram, 30 C Center of gravity of cabinet, 42 Certification K, 299 Certifications Korean certification, 299 Checklist Mechanical installation, 35 Circuit breakers Triggering current, 78 Cleaning, 112 Connecting Analog tachometer, 86 E-STOP button, 87 Input coupling relays, 87 Motor cables, 76 Options, 88 Output coupling relays, 88 Supply system lines, 76 Connecting transport units, 44 Connector Board A7119, 80 Crane transport aids, 43 Customer terminal block, 80 D Derating, 131 Voltage derating, 133 Design, 20 Frame size BC, 21 Frame size CC, 22 Frame size DC, 23 Frame size EC, 24, 25 Digital inputs, 83 Digital outputs, 83 Downloading the firmware (operator panel), 124 Duty cycles, 128 E Electromagnetic compatibility EMC-compliant design, 58 Encoder Incremental encoder evaluation, 84 Environment, 296 E-STOP button, 87 F Faults, 108 Acknowledging, 109 Faults and alarms, 108 Features, 17 Filter mats, 115 Floor levelness, 38 Frame size BC, 21 Frame size CC, 22 Frame size DC, 23 Frame size EC, 24, 25 Fuse Fan -T1 -F10 / -T1 -F11, 117 H Hearing protection, 15 I Incremental encoder evaluation, 84 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 301 Index Input coupling relays, 87 Inputs Analog, 83 Digital, 83 Temperature sensor, 84 Installation Installation, 44 Lifting the cabinet off the transport pallet, 41 Interfaces Peer-to-peer, 84 K Korean certification, 299 L Load class, 127 Load types, 127 M m.c.b. trip combined alarm signal, 86 M21, 46 M23, 47 M43, 47 M54, 47 Main switch, 77 Maintenance, 112, 113 Battery replacement, AOP30, 120 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, 121 Maintenance and servicing, 111 Mechanical installation Checklist, 35 Message m.c.b. trip, 86 Messages, 108 Mounting Canopies and hoods, 45 Canopy to increase the degree of protection to IP21, 46 Connecting transport units, 44 Hood to increase the degree of protection to IP23/IP43/IP54, 47 O Option M90 (crane transport aids), 43 Options A06, 240 A30, 242 A97, 244 B30, 203 B60, 210 B61, 211 B62, 212 B63, 213 B64, 213 B65, 214 B66, 214 B83, 255 C51, 216 Connecting, 88 D19, 288 D20, 289 D21, 290 D22, 291 G00, 181 G10, 183 G11, 185 G20, 187 G21, 190 G60, 271 G62, 274 K07, 286 K50, 277 K85, 218 L00, 219 L04, 196 L05, 197 L06, 197 L07, 197 L09, 199 L10, 193 L11, 193 L21, 194 L22, 220 L50, 220 L52, 257 L55, 223 L57, 205 L59, 207 L82, 257 L84, 260 L85, 194 L86, 246 L87, 263 L88, 265 L90, 268 L91, 286 L99, 270 M10, 195 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 302 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Index M21, 280 M23, 281 M43, 282 M54, 283 M58, 284 M59, 284 M60, 285 M66, 285 P11, 215 S01, 195 S02, 196 U09, 287 V60, 199 V70, 226 V71, 228 V72, 229 V73, 230 V74, 231 W15, 248 W20 to W41, 249 W70 to W91, 252 Y01, 254 Y02, 200 Y03, 201 Y04, 202 Y51, 232 Y52, 234 Y53, 236 Y54, 236 Y55, 237 Y56, 237 Y60, 238 Original roof screws, 43 Output coupling relays, 88 Outputs Analog, 84 Digital, 83 P Peer-to-peer interface, 84 Position of use, 36 Power connections, 75 Connection cross-sections, 75 R Recycling, 296 Replacement Automatic firmware update, 123 Cabinet fan, 116 Filter mats, 115 Fuses, 117 Operator panel, 119 Operator panel battery, 119 SINAMICS DCM DC Converter, 121 Replacing components, 114 Replacing fuses, 117 Replacing the backup battery of the cabinet operator panel, 119 Replacing the cabinet operator panel, 119 Resources, 296 Room height, 37 S Service, 20 Shield support, 80 Shipping and handling monitors, 39 Shock indicator, 39 Shock indicator, 39 Signal connections, 80 Software update, 121 Spares Fuses, 117 Standards, 298 Storage, 34 T Technical specifications Duty cycles, 128 General, 125 Load types, 127 Temperature sensor, 84 Terminal Module Cabinet, 81 Terminals Connection capacity, 293 Stripped length, 293 Tightening torque, 293 Tool, 41, 55, 113 Transportation, 33 U Unpacking, 41 V Voltage derating, 133 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 303 Index X X177, 80 X71, 81 X72, 81 SINAMICS DCM Cabinet 304 Operating Instructions, 7/2012, A5E03740557 Siemens AG Industry Sector Postfach 48 48 90026 NURNBERG DEUTSCHLAND www.siemens.com/automation Subject to change 6RX1800-0SD74 (c) Siemens AG 2012